TSR PAGING INC
S-1/A, 1996-06-19
RADIOTELEPHONE COMMUNICATIONS
Previous: PENNSYLVANIA PHYSICIAN HEALTHCARE PLAN INC, 10SB12G/A, 1996-06-19
Next: ANSYS INC, S-1/A, 1996-06-19





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
     AS FILED WITH THE SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION ON JUNE 19, 1996
    
 
   
                                                       REGISTRATION NO. 333-3403
    
________________________________________________________________________________
                       SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION
                             WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549
                            ------------------------
 
   
                                AMENDMENT NO. 1
                                       TO
                                    FORM S-1
                             REGISTRATION STATEMENT
                                     UNDER
                           THE SECURITIES ACT OF 1933
    
                            ------------------------
                                TSR PAGING INC.
             (EXACT NAME OF REGISTRANT AS SPECIFIED IN ITS CHARTER)
                            ------------------------
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                          <C>                                         <C>
               DELAWARE                                  4812                                 22-2779719
   (STATE OR OTHER JURISDICTION OF           (PRIMARY STANDARD INDUSTRIAL                  (I.R.S. EMPLOYER
    INCORPORATION OR ORGANIZATION)           CLASSIFICATION CODE NUMBER)                 IDENTIFICATION NO.)
</TABLE>
 
                            ------------------------
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                        <C>
                                                                               LEONARD DISAVINO
                                                                            CHIEF EXECUTIVE OFFICER
                                                                                TSR PAGING INC.
                    400 KELBY STREET                                           400 KELBY STREET
               FORT LEE, NEW JERSEY 07024                                 FORT LEE, NEW JERSEY 07024
                     (201) 947-5300                                             (201) 947-5300
       (ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, AND TELEPHONE             (NAME, ADDRESS, INCLUDING ZIP CODE, AND TELEPHONE
      NUMBER, INCLUDING AREA CODE, OF REGISTRANT'S                       NUMBER, INCLUDING AREA CODE,
              PRINCIPAL EXECUTIVE OFFICES)                                   OF AGENT FOR SERVICE)
 
                                                     COPIES TO:
                  ROGER H. KIMMEL, ESQ.                                    VINCENT PAGANO JR., ESQ.
                    LATHAM & WATKINS                                      SIMPSON THACHER & BARTLETT
              885 THIRD AVENUE, SUITE 1000                                   425 LEXINGTON AVENUE
                NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10022                                   NEW YORK, NEW YORK 10017
                     (212) 906-1200                                             (212) 455-2000
</TABLE>
    
 
                            ------------------------
 
     APPROXIMATE DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF PROPOSED SALE TO THE PUBLIC: As soon as
practicable after this Registration Statement becomes effective.
 
     If any of the securities being registered on this Form are to be offered on
a  delayed or continuous basis pursuant to  Rule 415 under the Securities Act of
1933, check the following box. [ ]
 
     If this Form  is filed to  register additional securities  for an  offering
pursuant to Rule 462(b) under the Securities Act, please check the following box
and  list  the  Securities  Act registration  statement  number  of  the earlier
effective registration statement for the same offering. [ ]
 
     If this Form is  a post-effective amendment filed  pursuant to Rule  462(c)
under  the Securities Act, check  the following box and  list the Securities Act
registration statement number  of the earlier  effective registration  statement
for the same offering. [ ]
 
     If  delivery of the prospectus is expected to be made pursuant to Rule 434,
please check the following box. [ ]
                            ------------------------
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                         CALCULATION OF REGISTRATION FEE
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                                        PROPOSED
                                                                        MAXIMUM        PROPOSED MAXIMUM      AMOUNT OF
            TITLE OF EACH CLASS OF                 AMOUNT TO BE      OFFERING PRICE        AGGREGATE        REGISTRATION
         SECURITIES TO BE REGISTERED              REGISTERED(1)       PER SHARE(2)     OFFERING PRICE(2)       FEE(3)
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                              <C>                 <C>               <C>                  <C>
Common Stock, $.01 par value                     5,060,000 shares        $18.00           $91,080,000         $ 31,407
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
</TABLE>
    
 
(1) Includes shares that the Underwriters have  the option to purchase to  cover
    over-allotments, if any.
 
(2) Estimated  solely for purposes of  calculating the registration fee pursuant
    to Rule 457 under the Securities Act.
 
   
(3) A registration fee in the amount of $25,863 has been paid previously by  the
    Company. An additional fee of $5,543 is included herewith.
    
                            ------------------------
     THE  REGISTRANT HEREBY AMENDS  THIS REGISTRATION STATEMENT  ON SUCH DATE OR
DATES AS MAY BE NECESSARY TO DELAY ITS EFFECTIVE DATE UNTIL THE REGISTRANT SHALL
FILE A  FURTHER  AMENDMENT  WHICH SPECIFICALLY  STATES  THAT  THIS  REGISTRATION
STATEMENT  SHALL THEREAFTER BECOME EFFECTIVE IN  ACCORDANCE WITH SECTION 8(A) OF
THE SECURITIES ACT  OF 1933  OR UNTIL  THE REGISTRATION  STATEMENT SHALL  BECOME
EFFECTIVE  ON SUCH DATE AS THE COMMISSION, ACTING PURSUANT TO SAID SECTION 8(A),
MAY DETERMINE.
 
________________________________________________________________________________





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                             CROSS-REFERENCE SHEET
                   PURSUANT TO ITEM 501(B) OF REGULATION S-K
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                  FORM S-1 ITEM
                               NUMBER AND CAPTION                                   LOCATION IN PROSPECTUS
      ---------------------------------------------------------------------  -------------------------------------
<C>   <S>                                                                    <C>
  1.  Forepart  of the Registration Statement  and Outside Front Cover Page
      of Prospectus........................................................  Facing Page; Cross-Reference Sheet;
                                                                               Outside Front Cover Page
  2.  Inside Front and Outside Back Cover Pages of Prospectus..............  Inside Front and Outside Back Cover
                                                                               Pages; Available Information
  3.  Summary Information,  Risk Factors  and Ratio  of Earnings  to  Fixed
      Charges..............................................................  Prospectus Summary; Risk Factors
  4.  Use of Proceeds......................................................  Proceeds of Offering
  5.  Determination of Offering Price......................................  Underwriting
  6.  Dilution.............................................................  Dilution
  7.  Selling Security Holders.............................................  *
  8.  Plan of Distribution.................................................  Outside Front Cover Page;
                                                                               Underwriting
  9.  Description of Securities to be Registered...........................  Prospectus Summary; Description of
                                                                               Capital Stock
 10.  Interests of Named Experts and Counsel...............................  Legal Matters; Experts
 11.  Information with Respect to the Registrant...........................  Inside Front and Outside Back Cover
                                                                               Pages; Prospectus Summary; Risk
                                                                               Factors; Dividend Policy;
                                                                               Capitalization; Selected Financial
                                                                               Data; Management's Discussion and
                                                                               Analysis of Financial Condition and
                                                                               Results of Operations; Business;
                                                                               Management; Certain Relationships
                                                                               and Related Party Transactions;
                                                                               Principal Stockholders; Description
                                                                               of Capital Stock; Shares Eligible
                                                                               For Future Sale; Description of
                                                                               Certain Indebtedness; Financial
                                                                               Statements
 12.  Disclosure  of Commission Position  on Indemnification for Securities
      Act Liabilities......................................................  *
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
*  Answer is negative or item is not applicable.
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                EXPLANATORY NOTE
 
   
     This Registration Statement contains  two separate prospectuses. The  first
prospectus  relates to a public  offering in the United  States and Canada of an
aggregate of 3,520,000 shares of Common Stock. The second prospectus relates  to
a  concurrent offering outside the  United States and Canada  of an aggregate of
880,000 shares of Common Stock. The  prospectuses for the U.S. Offering and  the
International  Offering will  be identical with  the exception of  a front cover
page and a  back cover  page. Such alternate  pages appear  in the  Registration
Statement immediately following the complete prospectus for the U.S. Offering.
    





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
Information   contained  herein  is  subject   to  completion  or  amendment.  A
registration statement  relating to  these securities  has been  filed with  the
Securities  and Exchange  Commission. These securities  may not be  sold nor may
offers to buy be accepted prior  to the time the registration statement  becomes
effective.  This  prospectus  shall  not  constitute an  offer  to  sell  or the
solicitation of an offer to buy nor shall there be any sale of these  securities
in  any State in which such offer,  solicitation or sale would be unlawful prior
to registration or qualification under the securities laws of any such State.
 
   
                   SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JUNE 19, 1996
    
PROSPECTUS
   
                                4,400,000 SHARES
                                 TSR PAGING INC.                          [LOGO]
                                  COMMON STOCK
                          ---------------------------
    
 
   
     All of the shares of  Common Stock, par value  $.01 per share (the  'Common
Stock'),  of TSR Paging Inc. (the 'Company') offered hereby are being offered by
the Company. Of the 4,400,000 shares  of Common Stock offered, 3,520,000  shares
are  being  offered  initially in  the  United  States and  Canada  by  the U.S.
Underwriters (the  'U.S.  Offering'),  and  880,000  shares  are  being  offered
initially  outside the  United States and  Canada in  a concurrent international
offering (the 'International Offering') by the International Managers  (together
with   the  U.S.   Underwriters,  the   'Underwriters').  These   offerings  are
collectively referred to herein as the 'Offerings.' See 'Underwriting.'
    
 
   
     Prior to the  Offerings, there  has been no  public market  for the  Common
Stock.  It is currently anticipated that  the initial public offering price will
be between $16.00 and  $18.00 per share. The  initial public offering price  and
the underwriting discount and commission per share are identical for each of the
Offerings. See 'Underwriting' for information relating to the factors considered
in determining the initial public offering price.
    
 
   
     The  Common  Stock has  been approved  for listing  on the  Nasdaq National
Market, subject to official notice of issuance, under the symbol 'BEEP.'
    
                          ---------------------------
 
     FOR A DISCUSSION OF  CERTAIN RISKS TO BE  CONSIDERED IN CONNECTION WITH  AN
INVESTMENT  IN THE COMMON STOCK OFFERED  HEREBY, SEE 'RISK FACTORS' BEGINNING ON
PAGE 8.
                          ---------------------------
 
THESE SECURITIES  HAVE  NOT  BEEN  APPROVED OR  DISAPPROVED  BY  THE  SECURITIES
     AND   EXCHANGE   COMMISSION   OR  ANY   STATE   SECURITIES  COMMISSION
        NOR HAS  THE SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION OR  ANY  STATE
          SECURITIES   COMMISSION   PASSED   UPON   THE   ACCURACY  OR
               ADEQUACY  OF  THIS  PROSPECTUS.  ANY  REPRESENTATION
                       TO THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                    PRICE TO            UNDERWRITING DISCOUNTS           PROCEEDS TO
                                                     PUBLIC               AND COMMISSIONS (1)            COMPANY (2)
<S>                                          <C>                     <C>                            <C>
Per Share..................................            $                           $                          $
Total (3)..................................        $                           $                          $
</TABLE>
 
(1) The  Company  has  agreed  to  indemnify  the  Underwriters  against certain
    liabilities, including  liabilities under  the Securities  Act of  1933,  as
    amended. See 'Underwriting.'
   
(2) Before deducting expenses payable by the Company estimated at $750,000.
    
   
(3) The Company has granted to the U.S. Underwriters a 30-day option to purchase
    up  to  532,000 additional  shares of  Common  Stock on  the same  terms and
    conditions as set forth above solely  to cover over-allotments, if any.  The
    International  Managers have been granted a similar option to purchase up to
    128,000 additional shares solely to  cover over-allotments, if any. If  such
    options  are  exercised in  full, the  total  Price to  Public, Underwriting
    Discounts and Commissions and Proceeds to  Company will be $               ,
    $            and $            , respectively. See 'Underwriting.'
    
                          ---------------------------
 
     The  shares of Common Stock  offered by this Prospectus  are offered by the
U.S.  Underwriters  subject  to  prior  sale,  to  withdrawal,  cancellation  or
modification  of the offer without notice, to  delivery to and acceptance by the
U.S. Underwriters  and  to  certain  further conditions.  It  is  expected  that
delivery  of the shares will be made at the offices of Lehman Brothers Inc., New
York, New York, on or about           , 1996.
                          ---------------------------
 
LEHMAN BROTHERS
                 SMITH BARNEY INC.
                                 WESSELS, ARNOLD & HENDERSON
                                                              BRENNER SECURITIES
                                                                  CORPORATION
              , 1996
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
TSR Paging  Inc. is  among the  leaders  in the  wireless industry  in  creating
direct, one-on-one relationships with consumers . . . via a company-owned retail
store strategy.
    
 
   
Inside  Front Cover Page of Prospectus: This page contains 3 photographs showing
both the inside and outside of Company stores.
    
 
   
Fold-out of Inside Front Cover Page of Prospectus: These pages contain a map  of
the  United States  which graphically depict  the geographic areas  in which the
Company provides wireless messaging services.
    









IN CONNECTION WITH THESE  OFFERINGS, THE UNDERWRITERS  MAY OVER-ALLOT OR  EFFECT
TRANSACTIONS WHICH STABILIZE OR MAINTAIN THE MARKET PRICE OF THE COMMON STOCK AT
A  LEVEL  ABOVE THAT  WHICH MIGHT  OTHERWISE  PREVAIL IN  THE OPEN  MARKET. SUCH
TRANSACTIONS MAY  BE  EFFECTED ON  THE  NASDAQ  NATIONAL MARKET,  IN  THE  OVER-
THE-COUNTER  MARKET  OR  OTHERWISE.  SUCH  STABILIZING,  IF  COMMENCED,  MAY  BE
DISCONTINUED AT ANY TIME.





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                               PROSPECTUS SUMMARY
 
     The  following summary  is qualified in  its entirety by  the more detailed
information and  financial statements,  including the  notes thereto,  appearing
elsewhere  in this Prospectus. Unless the context otherwise requires, references
in this Prospectus to  'TSR Paging' or  the 'Company' refer  to TSR Paging  Inc.
Unless  otherwise stated,  the information in  this Prospectus  assumes that the
Underwriters' over-allotment options are not exercised.
 
                                  THE COMPANY
 
   
     TSR Paging is a  leading regional provider  of wireless messaging  products
and  services  and believes  that it  is  one of  the fastest  growing, low-cost
wireless messaging  companies in  the  United States.  From  1991 to  1995,  the
Company's  subscriber base  grew at  an average  compound annual  growth rate of
92.4% from 44,304  units in  service to 607,725  units in  service. During  this
period,  all of the Company's growth has been internally generated. At March 31,
1996, the Company's subscriber  base had grown to  696,623 units in service  and
the  Company was ranked as the 12th largest paging company in the United States,
according to industry sources.
    
 
     The Company  focuses  its  business  efforts  on  densely  populated  major
metropolitan  markets  and  population  corridors  which  exhibit  the  size and
demographic trends that the Company believes should offer significant demand for
the Company's products and services. The  Company seeks to maximize its  returns
on  capital and leverage its operating  cost structure by achieving a sufficient
base of subscribers on a regional basis.
 
     The  Company's  operations  are  currently  organized  into  two  operating
regions:  (i) the Northeast, including certain metropolitan markets in New York,
Connecticut, New  Jersey,  Massachusetts,  eastern  Pennsylvania,  Maryland  and
Washington,  D.C.; and (ii) the West,  including certain metropolitan markets in
California, Arizona and Nevada.
 
     The  Company's  long   term  operating  objectives   are  to  continue   to
aggressively  grow its base of subscribers throughout  the U.S. at the same time
as achieving  its operating  profitability  and cash  flow growth  targets.  The
Company's strategy to achieve these objectives involves two distinct components:
(i) operating strategy and (ii) geographic expansion strategy.
 
   
     The  Company applies a focused,  market-specific operating strategy to each
of the markets in which  it operates. The key  common elements of this  strategy
include: (i) increasing its market penetration through the reseller distribution
channel,  (ii) expanding  its distribution  through Company-owned  stores, (iii)
continuing to maintain its low-cost provider status; (iv) providing a high level
of customer service,  (v) focusing on  selling as opposed  to leasing pagers  to
customers,  and  (vi) developing  strategic  alliances with  other  providers of
communications services.  See  'Business  -- Business  Objectives  --  Operating
Strategy.'
    
 
   
     The  Company's geographic expansion strategy incorporates two key elements:
(i) the continued build-out of its  existing regional networks in the  Northeast
(anchored by New York City) and the West (anchored by Los Angeles), and (ii) the
development  of  networks in  new markets,  including the  formation of  two new
operating regions, covering the Midwest (anchored by Chicago) and the  Southeast
(anchored   by  Miami/Ft.  Lauderdale).  During   1996,  the  Company  commenced
construction in its new Midwest and Southeast regions. In addition, the  Company
expanded  service within its existing  West region to the  San Francisco and San
Jose markets.  See  'Business --  Business  Objectives --  Geographic  Expansion
Strategy.'
    
 
     The  Company primarily targets the consumer segment of the market. Industry
sources expect this segment to grow at a faster rate than the industry  average.
The   Company  believes  this  strong  consumer  growth  is  attributable  to  a
combination of factors including declining costs of service, expanding  channels
of  distribution  and  greater consumer  awareness  of the  benefits  offered by
wireless communications  technology.  In  addition,  the  Company  believes  the
consumer  market  is  less  capital  intensive  and  more  profitable  than  the
commercial market, primarily because consumers  typically buy rather than  lease
pagers and also because the consumer is generally less sensitive to the price of
wireless
 
                                       3
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
messaging  services  than  the  commercial subscriber.  The  Company  strives to
develop close  ties with  its  subscribers by  providing high  quality  customer
service and post-sales support in order to lower subscriber disconnect rates and
position the Company as a likely distributor of other wireless products, such as
cellular and wireless personal communication services ('PCS').
 
   
     The  Company seeks  to maximize its  penetration of the  consumer market by
distributing its services  primarily through  the reseller  channel and  through
stores  owned and  operated by  the Company. Through  the use  of resellers, the
Company is able to  efficiently market its services  to a broad population  base
and achieve higher network utilization with lower incremental capital, sales and
administrative  costs. The reseller channel allows the Company to rapidly gain a
presence in  newly  opened markets  and  increase its  penetration  in  existing
markets.  In addition,  the Company  is able  to reach  the consumer  at a lower
incremental cost,  primarily because  the Company  does not  incur the  selling,
marketing,  administrative  and  disconnection  expenses  associated  with these
subscribers. See 'Business -- Wireless Messaging Operations.'
    
 
     The Company has been operating its own stores since July 1993 and at  March
31,  1996 had 67 stores in operation in  eight states. As the appeal of wireless
messaging services to the  consumer market grows, the  Company believes that  it
will be able to capture an increasingly significant share of this market through
a  targeted retail  distribution strategy that  emphasizes Company-owned stores.
The Company's control  of this  distribution outlet  enables it  to control  the
quality  of  sales personnel,  ensure  that subscribers  make  educated purchase
decisions and maintain  high quality  customer service. The  Company expects  to
continue  to develop this channel  and plans to open  stores in markets in which
the Company provides regional wireless messaging services.
 
     The Company believes  that it  has one of  the lowest  operating costs  per
pager  in  the  wireless  messaging  industry.  The  Company's  average  monthly
operating costs per pager were $5.71, $4.50 and $3.81 for the years ended  1993,
1994  and  1995, respectively.  The Company  attributes  its low  operating cost
structure to a combination of factors,  including its (i) high quality  customer
service  and resultant lower rate of  disconnections, (ii) focus on the reseller
distribution channel whereby the reseller  absorbs a significant portion of  the
operating  expenses  per pager,  (iii)  increasing penetration  of  its existing
markets and ability to realize economies of scale, (iv) efficient allocation and
productivity of personnel, and (v) volume purchase arrangements with suppliers.
 
     The Company  has  historically  distinguished itself  from  other  wireless
messaging  operators by providing  high quality customer service  in each of its
markets. Substantially all of the  Company's wireless messaging systems are  900
MHz  systems which  utilize Motorola's FLEX'tm'  technology. FLEX'tm' technology
enables the Company  to more  efficiently use  its bandwidth  by increasing  the
number  of messages  transmitted per minute  and thereby increase  the number of
pagers in  service which  can be  supported on  its systems.  As a  result,  the
Company's  wireless messaging  systems experience  little delay  in transmitting
messages and are highly reliable. As  part of its commitment to 'full  service,'
the  Company strives to  provide direct subscribers  with high quality post-sale
maintenance, including 24-hour on-call repair  and next-day replacement of  lost
or  damaged equipment. In addition, unlike  many of its competitors, the Company
provides its reseller distributors with a high level of service by, among  other
things,  allowing resellers  to integrate  their billing  and activation systems
with those of the Company.
 
                 BACKGROUND AND REORGANIZED CORPORATE STRUCTURE
 
   
     The Company's current business was established in 1987 by Leonard  DiSavino
and  Philip Sacks. Until 1995, all of the common stock and partnership interests
of the Company were owned by  Leonard DiSavino, Philip Sacks and certain  trusts
for  the  benefit  of  their respective  children  (collectively,  the 'Founding
Stockholders'). See 'The Company.'
    
 
     In  July  1995,  a   group  of  investors  led   by  TA  Associates,   Inc.
(collectively, the 'Investors') purchased from Leonard DiSavino and Philip Sacks
(i) discount notes for $34 million with an aggregate face value of $70.0 million
(the  'Notes'),  which  are  the non-recourse  obligations  of  Messrs. DiSavino
 
                                       4
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
and Sacks and (ii) an option (the 'Option') for $1 million to purchase 40.66% of
the fully-diluted common stock of the Company from the Founding Stockholders  in
exchange for a portion of the Notes. The Investors intend to exercise the Option
simultaneously with the consummation of the Offerings. In addition, a portion of
the  proceeds from the Offerings  will be used to pay  a dividend of $35 million
(the 'Dividend') to  the Founding Stockholders,  which payment will  be used  by
Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks to repay in part the Notes. The obligations under the
Notes  will be satisfied in connection with the exercise of the Option. See 'Use
of Proceeds' and 'Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.'
    
 
   
     Prior to  the  Offerings, the  Company  was  an S  Corporation  subject  to
taxation  under Subchapter S  of the Internal  Revenue Code of  1986, as amended
(the 'Internal Revenue Code'). As a result, the net income of the Company  prior
to  the Offerings, for  federal (and some  state) income tax  purposes, has been
reported by, and taxed  directly to, the Company's  stockholders rather than  to
the Company. The Company's S Corporation status will terminate immediately prior
to the consummation of the Offerings and the Company will become a C Corporation
subject to corporate income taxation. No adverse tax consequences to the persons
who become stockholders in the Offerings are expected to result from termination
of  the Company's S  Corporation status. See  'Certain Relationships and Related
Party Transactions -- Tax Indemnification Agreement.'
    
 
                                 THE OFFERINGS
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                               <C>
Common Stock Offered by the Company
  U.S. Offering.................................  3,520,000 shares
  International Offering........................  880,000 shares
  Total.........................................  4,400,000 shares (1)
Common Stock to be outstanding after the
  Offerings.....................................  14,988,232 shares (1)(2)
 
Use of Proceeds.................................  The  net  proceeds  to  the  Company  from  the  Offerings  are
                                                  estimated  to be  approximately $68.8  million, after deducting
                                                  underwriting  discounts  and  commissions  and  the   estimated
                                                  offering  expenses payable by the  Company (assuming an initial
                                                  public offering price  of $17.00 per  share). The Company  will
                                                  use  approximately  $35.0 million  of the  net proceeds  of the
                                                  Offerings to pay  the Dividend  and the  remainder for  capital
                                                  expenditures   in   connection  with   system   and  geographic
                                                  expansion, potential acquisitions, working capital and  general
                                                  corporate purposes. Pending the use of funds for geographic and
                                                  system  expansion and other general corporate uses, the Company
                                                  will use approximately $33.8 million of the net proceeds of the
                                                  Offerings to repay indebtedness  under the Company's  revolving
                                                  credit facility.
 
Nasdaq National Market Symbol...................  The  Common Stock has  been approved for  listing on the Nasdaq
                                                  National Market, subject to official notice of issuance,  under
                                                  the symbol 'BEEP.'
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------
 
   
(1) Excludes  up to 660,000 shares  of Common Stock that  may be issued upon the
    exercise of the over-allotment options granted to the Underwriters.
    
 
   
(2) Excludes 316,407 shares of Common Stock reserved for issuance upon  exercise
    of  stock  options  outstanding  upon consummation  of  the  Offerings  at a
    weighted average  exercise price  of $8.50  per share  at the  date of  this
    Prospectus.  See  'Management --  1995  Phantom Stock  Plan'  and '  -- Non-
    Employee Director Stock Option Plan.'
    
 
                                       5
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      SUMMARY FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA

     The following table sets forth summary  financial data for the years  ended
December  31,  1991 and  December 31,  1992,  which have  been derived  from the
Company's financial statements audited by Cummings & Carroll, P.C.,  independent
public accountants, and for the years ended December 31, 1993, December 31, 1994
and  December  31, 1995  which have  been derived  from the  Company's financial
statements audited by Arthur Andersen LLP, independent public accountants, whose
report thereon is included elsewhere  in this Prospectus. The following  summary
financial data for the three months ended March 31, 1995 and March 31, 1996 have
been  derived from the Company's unaudited condensed financial statements which,
in the opinion of management, contain all adjustments (consisting of normal  and
recurring  adjustments)  necessary  to present  fairly  the  Company's financial
position and  results of  operations at  such dates  and for  such periods.  The
interim  results are not necessarily indicative of the results of operations for
the entire year. The  data presented below should  be read in conjunction  with,
and  is qualified in its  entirety by reference to,  the financial statements of
the Company and the related notes thereto appearing elsewhere in this Prospectus
and 'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results  of
Operations.'
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                          THREE MONTHS
                                                               YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,                   ENDED MARCH 31,
                                                  --------------------------------------------------   -------------------
                                                   1991      1992       1993       1994       1995       1995       1996
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
                                                                   (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S>                                               <C>       <C>       <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS DATA:
  Revenues:
    Services, rent and maintenance..............  $ 7,130   $ 8,500   $ 11,119   $ 17,954   $ 28,908   $  6,308   $  9,937
    Product sales...............................      809     1,586      8,481     14,088     18,615      3,931      4,954
    Cost of products sold.......................     (453)     (857)    (5,098)   (10,520)   (14,549)    (3,094)    (3,949)
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
      Net revenues..............................    7,486     9,229     14,502     21,522     32,974      7,145     10,942
  Services, rent and maintenance expenses.......    1,678     1,888      2,748      4,592      7,060      1,575      2,308
  Selling and marketing expenses................    1,562     1,810      1,814      3,332      5,399      1,178      1,771
  General and administrative expenses...........    2,295     2,560      3,377      5,165      8,719      1,943      3,422
  Depreciation and amortization.................    1,977     2,741      6,758      7,578     10,870      2,179      2,892
  Non-cash compensation expense(1)..............        0         0          0          0          0          0        747
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
  Operating income (loss).......................      (26)      230       (195)       855        926        270       (198)
  Other expense.................................        0         0          0          0        163          0          0
  Interest expense..............................      600       548        517      1,024      2,484        522        638
  Unusual item(2)...............................        0         0          0        590        564          0          0
  Income tax provision..........................        0         0          0         32         49          0          5
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
  Loss from continuing operations before
    discontinued operations and extraordinary
    item........................................     (626)     (318)      (712)      (791)    (2,334)      (252)      (841)
  Discontinued operations and extraordinary
    item(3).....................................        0         0          0          0        612          0          0
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
  Net loss......................................  $  (626)  $  (318)  $   (712)  $   (791)  $ (2,946)  $   (252)  $   (841)
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
                                                  -------   -------   --------   --------   --------   --------   --------
  Pro forma loss from continuing operations
    before discontinued operations and
    extraordinary item(4).......................                                            $ (2,284)             $   (836)
  Pro forma loss per common share from
    continuing operations before discontinued
    operations and extraordinary item(4)........                                            $  (0.18)             $  (0.07)
  Weighted average shares outstanding...........                                              12,805                12,805
 
OTHER DATA:
  EBITDA(5).....................................  $ 1,951   $ 2,971   $  6,563   $  8,433   $ 11,796   $  2,449   $  3,441
  EBITDA margin(6)..............................     26.1%     32.2%      45.3%      39.2%      35.8%      34.3%      31.4%
  Average monthly revenue per unit(7)...........  $ 17.65   $ 12.77   $   8.00   $   6.18   $   5.20   $   6.11   $   5.08
  Average monthly operating expense per
    unit(8).....................................    11.70      9.40       5.71       4.50       3.81       4.55       3.83
  Units in service (at end of period)...........   44,304    66,674    164,883    319,687    607,725    368,767    696,623
  Units in service per employee (at end of
    period)(9)..................................      642       901      1,633      1,648      1,905      1,748      1,819
  Selling and marketing expenses per net
    subscriber additions(10)....................  $157.03   $ 80.91   $  18.47   $  21.52   $  18.74   $  24.00   $  19.92
  Capital expenditures..........................    2,234     4,288     10,969     13,160     20,643      2,777      7,252
</TABLE>
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                 MARCH 31, 1996
                                                                                           ---------------------------
                                                                                                          PRO FORMA
                                                                                            ACTUAL     AS ADJUSTED(11)
                                                                                           --------    ---------------
<S>                                                                                        <C>         <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
  Cash and cash equivalents.............................................................   $    116        $33,930
  Total assets..........................................................................     42,456         76,270
  Total long-term debt (including current maturities)...................................     43,750         43,750
  Total stockholders' equity (deficit)..................................................    (11,824)        21,643
 
</TABLE>
    
                                                   (Footnotes on following page)
 
                                       6
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
 (1) During  1992  and 1993,  the Company  granted  to certain  employees equity
     interests which were to be realized upon the occurrence of certain  events.
     Effective  January 1, 1996, these equity  interests were cancelled and such
     employees were  issued 168,900  units under  the Phantom  Stock Plan  at  a
     strike  price of $0, vest over a five-year period from the original date of
     grant in 1992 or 1993, as applicable, and had a grant date value of $6  per
     unit.  The  employees  received  credit for  vesting  through  the  date of
     cancellation of  the equity  interests. In  addition, on  January 1,  1996,
     150,350  units were issued under the Phantom  Stock Plan, at a strike price
     of $6  per unit  and vest  over a  five-year period.  As determined  by  an
     independent  investment  bank  valuation  and  the  Company's  Compensation
     Committee the per unit value  on January 1, 1996 was  $6. As a result,  the
     financial  statements for  the three  months ended  March 31,  1996 reflect
     non-cash compensation  expense  of  $747,000  (which  amount  includes  the
     cumulative  effect of the  vesting from 1992  forward) with a corresponding
     credit to additional paid-in-capital.  The remaining non-cash  compensation
     expense  of $266,000 will  be recognized by  the Company over  the next two
     years. In connection with the Offerings, the above units will be  converted
     to  options under  the TSR  Paging Inc.  Employee Option  Plan. Assuming an
     initial public offering price of $17.00  per share, the units will  convert
     to a total of 316,407 options at an exercise price of $8.50 per share.
    
 
 (2) The  unusual  item  of  $590,000  in  1994  primarily  consists  of certain
     financing costs  associated  with the  commencement  of an  initial  public
     offering  which was  terminated prior  to completion.  The unusual  item of
     $564,000 in  1995 primarily  consists of  costs related  to certain  merger
     activity.
 
 (3) The discontinued operations charge of $300,000 consists of costs related to
     the   discontinuation   of  the   Company's  telephone   answering  service
     operations. The extraordinary item of $312,000 is related to the  write-off
     of  deferred  financing  costs  following  the  refinancing  of  the Credit
     Agreement.
 
   
 (4) Following termination  of the  Company's status  as an  S corporation  upon
     consummation  of the  Offerings, the Company  will be  subject to corporate
     income taxation. Accordingly,  pro forma  loss reflects  Federal and  state
     income  taxes as if the  Company has been a C  corporation based on the tax
     rates that were in effect during the periods presented. See 'The  Company.'
     The   pro  forma  statement  of  operations   data  does  not  reflect  (i)
     distributions to Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks  that, if the Company were a  C
     corporation,  would be recorded as compensation  expense by the Company and
     (ii) reductions in interest expense  relating to the paydown of  borrowings
     under  the Company's revolving  credit facility, as  it is anticipated that
     the Company will reborrow such amounts to fund its expansion strategy.  Pro
     forma  loss  including  discontinued operations  before  extraordinary item
     would have been $(.20) per  share and $(.07) per  share for the year  ended
     December  31, 1995 and the three months ended March 31, 1996, respectively.
     Pro forma  loss including  discontinued operations  and extraordinary  item
     would  have been $(.23) per  share and $(.07) per  share for the year ended
     December 31, 1995 and the three months ended March 31, 1996, respectively.
    
 
   
 (5) EBITDA represents operating income  plus depreciation and amortization  and
     non-cash  compensation expense. EBITDA is a financial measure commonly used
     in the Company's industry and is  not intended to represent cash flows  for
     the period, nor has it been presented as an alternative to operating income
     or as an indicator of operating performance and should not be considered in
     isolation  or  as  a substitute  for  measures of  performance  prepared in
     accordance with  generally accepted  accounting principles.  EBITDA is  not
     determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. See
     'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
     Operations'  and the Financial  Statements and the  Notes thereto appearing
     elsewhere in this Prospectus.
    
 
 (6) EBITDA margin is  calculated by dividing  (a) EBITDA by  (b) net  revenues.
     EBITDA  margin is a measure  commonly used in the  Company's industry as an
     indicator of the efficiency of the Company's operations.
 
   
 (7) Average monthly revenue  per unit  ('ARPU') is calculated  by dividing  (a)
     services,  rent  and  maintenance  revenues  for  the  period  by  (b)  the
     applicable number of months in the  period, and dividing the result by  (c)
     the average number of units in service for the period.
    
 
   
 (8) Average  monthly  operating  expense  per unit  ('EXPU')  is  calculated by
     dividing (a) total operating expenses before depreciation and  amortization
     and  non-cash compensation  expense for  the period  by (b)  the applicable
     number of months in the period, and dividing the result by (c) the  average
     number of units in service for the period.
    
 
 (9) Employees  at the end  of the period includes  all full-time employees plus
     part-time employees divided by two, excluding employees associated with the
     Company's discontinued operations.
 
   
(10) Selling and marketing expenses per  net subscriber additions is  calculated
     by  dividing (a) selling and  marketing expenses for the  period by (b) the
     net change in units in service during such period.
    
 
   
(11) The Pro  Forma As  Adjusted amounts  reflect (i)  the consummation  of  the
     Offerings,  (ii) the payment of  the Dividend and (iii)  the recording of a
     deferred tax liability of $347,000 to reflect differences between book  and
     tax accounting for depreciation, inventory and certain reserves as a result
     of  the conversion of the Company from an S corporation to a C corporation.
     It has been assumed  that the net  proceeds have been  applied to cash  and
     cash  equivalents pending the  use of such proceeds  to fund geographic and
     system expansion.
    
 
                                       7





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                  RISK FACTORS
 
     Prospective  investors should consider carefully,  together with all of the
information contained in this Prospectus, the following factors.
 
EXPANSION INTO NEW MARKETS; CAPITAL REQUIREMENTS AND START-UP COSTS
 
   
     The Company  is in  the  process of  implementing a  significant  expansion
program  which  involves the  Company's entry  into  new geographic  markets and
compliance  with   the  construction   requirements  imposed   by  the   Federal
Communications  Commission ('FCC') pursuant to numerous authorizations issued by
the FCC  on the  frequency  929.2125 MHz  (collectively, the  Company's  'System
Licenses').  Currently, the Company does  not offer inter-regional or nationwide
coverage to its  subscribers. Thus for  example, a subscriber  in the  Northeast
region  would not be able to receive messages in the Midwest or West region. The
Company estimates that  its expansion program  will require approximately  $60.0
million  in aggregate  capital expenditures  during 1996  and 1997.  The Company
expects to fund these  capital requirements from a  combination of a portion  of
the  net proceeds from  the Offerings, available funds  under the Company's bank
financing agreements and cash flow from its operations. However, there can be no
assurance that the  Company will be  able to complete  its expansion program  as
scheduled,  generate sufficient cash  flow from operations to  meet a portion of
its capital  requirements or  obtain  additional debt  or equity  financing,  on
reasonable  terms or  at all.  In addition,  the Company  will incur substantial
start-up costs in  connection with  expanding its operations  into new  markets,
which  will  result  in initial  operating  losses  in those  markets.  Any such
operating losses could have a material  adverse effect on the Company's  results
of  operations for  such periods. Based  upon historical positive  cash flow and
available borrowings under a credit facility,  the Company believes that it  has
adequate  resources to sustain its  current operations. See '  -- History of Net
Losses.'
    
 
   
COMPETITION; CONSOLIDATION OF INDUSTRY
    
 
     The wireless  messaging industry  is a  highly competitive  industry,  with
price  being the  primary means  of differentiation  among providers  of numeric
messaging services  (which account  for the  majority of  the Company's  current
revenues). Companies in the industry also compete on the basis of coverage area,
enhanced   services,  transmission  quality,  system  reliability  and  customer
service. The  Company  faces  competition  from  other  wireless  communications
companies  in  all  markets  in  which it  operates.  Certain  of  the Company's
competitors, which include public  and private telecommunications companies  and
regional  and national wireless messaging  companies, possess greater financial,
technical, marketing  and other  resources  than the  Company.  If any  of  such
companies  were to devote additional resources  to the numeric or other wireless
messaging businesses, the  Company's results  of operations  could be  adversely
affected.  Some  of these  larger  competitors may  also  be able  to  use their
substantial financial resources to increase  the already competitive pricing  in
the  markets in which the Company operates,  which may have an adverse effect on
the Company's  results  of  operations. In  addition,  other  entities  offering
wireless  two-way communications  technology, including  cellular telephone, PCS
and specialized mobile radio  services ('SMR'), also  compete with the  wireless
messaging  services that  the Company provides.  There can be  no assurance that
additional competitors will not enter markets served by the Company or that  the
Company will be able to compete successfully. See 'Business -- Competition.'
 
   
     The  paging industry  is currently undergoing  significant consolidation as
various  participants   seek   to  accomplish   growth   through   acquisitions.
Consolidation  allows larger  companies to  garner economies  of scale  and thus
makes it more difficult for smaller companies to compete successfully. There can
be no  assurance  that  the Company  will  not  be adversely  affected  by  such
consolidation.
    
 
TECHNOLOGICAL CHANGE
 
     The   wireless   communications   industry   is   characterized   by  rapid
technological change.  Technological  advances in  the  wireless  communications
industry  may result in the availability of new services or products competitive
with the  wireless messaging  services  provided, or  to  be developed  by,  the
Company.  Recent  and  proposed  regulatory  changes by  the  FCC  are  aimed at
encouraging such  new services  and products.  Moreover, changes  in  technology
could lower the cost of competitive services and
 
                                       8
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
products  to a level where the Company's services and products would become less
competitive or to where the  Company would be required  to reduce the prices  of
its  services and products. There  can be no assurance  that the Company will be
able to develop or introduce new services and products to remain competitive  or
that  the  Company  will  not  be  adversely  affected  in  the  event  of  such
technological developments. See 'Business -- Competition.'
 
     Several wireless  two-way  communication technologies,  including  cellular
telephone  service, broadband and  narrowband PCS, SMR,  low-speed data networks
and mobile  satellite  services, are  currently  in use  or  under  development.
Although these technologies are currently more expensive than wireless messaging
services  or are  not yet  broadly available,  future technological improvements
could  result  in  increased  capacity  and  efficiency  for  wireless   two-way
communication  and, accordingly, could  result in increased  competition for the
Company. Some  of  these  service  providers  are  bundling  wireless  messaging
services  with  two-way  service  in  a  combined  handset.  Large manufacturers
dominate technological development in the wireless communications industry,  and
changes  in their  methods of  distributing one-way  wireless messaging products
could reduce the Company's access to  technology and may have an adverse  effect
on the Company's operations. There can be no assurance that the Company will not
be adversely affected by such technological change. See
'Business -- Competition.'
 
REGULATORY CONSIDERATIONS
 
     Government  Regulation.   The Company's  wireless messaging  operations are
subject to regulation  by the  FCC and,  to a  lesser extent,  by various  state
regulatory  agencies. From time to time, legislation and regulations which could
potentially adversely  affect the  Company  are proposed  by federal  and  state
legislators  and regulators. Moreover, FCC approval and authorization is subject
to challenge prior to issuance and appeal after issuance. However, there can  be
no  assurance that Federal  or other state  legislation will not  be adopted, or
that the FCC or the  various state agencies will  not adopt regulations or  take
other actions, whether in connection with challenges, appeals or otherwise, that
would  adversely affect the business of  the Company. In addition, the Company's
wireless messaging  facilities  are also  subject  to certain  Federal  Aviation
Administration  regulations  with  respect  to  the  construction,  marking  and
lighting  of   wireless  messaging   transmitter   towers  and   antennas.   See
'Business -- Regulation.'
 
   
     Required  Auctions Under the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993 (the
'Budget Act').  The Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993 (the 'Budget Act')
authorized the  FCC to  implement  procedures which  will  require that  new  or
modified  licenses for  portions of  the radio spectrum  used by  the Company be
awarded by an auction process. The FCC has enacted general regulations regarding
the conduct of such auctions and the FCC has already proceeded to assign certain
licenses pursuant to auctions.  Since these procedures are  new to the  wireless
communications  industry,  the  Company  cannot  predict  their  impact  on  its
licensing practices,  although the  Company  believes that,  to the  extent  the
Company  seeks  to  expand its  radio  spectrum  licenses in  the  future, these
procedures may make such expansion of the Company's operations more costly.  The
Budget  Act also  created a  new regulatory  category called  'commercial mobile
radio  services'  ('CMRS'),  which  includes  most  paging  providers  currently
operating  as either  radio common carriers  ('RCCs') or  private carrier paging
operators ('PCPs'),  including  the Company.  CMRS  licensees make  service  (i)
available  to  the  public,  (ii)  on  a  for-profit  basis  and  (iii)  through
interconnection with  the public  switched  telephone network.  'Private  Mobile
Radio  Service' ('PMRS') licensees provide service  that is neither CMRS nor the
functional equivalent of CMRS, i.e., service that  does not meet one or more  of
the  elements  of the  CMRS  definition. The  FCC  has adopted  rules  to govern
regulation of  this  new category,  which  have become  effective,  except  that
certain  Private  Mobile systems,  including PCP  systems,  will continue  to be
regulated as PMRS  until August  1996, at which  time such  systems will  become
subject  to CMRS regulation.  In addition, in  February 1996, the  FCC adopted a
Notice of Proposed Rulemaking  ('NPRM') in which the  FCC proposed to utilize  a
geographic  licensing process  in place  of the  current site-specific licensing
process and to sell  geographic licenses at auction.  There can be no  assurance
that  such auctions, if  implemented, would not materially  increase the cost of
licenses which may be sought by the Company in the future.
    
 
   
     Moreover, in a First Report and Order and Public Notice adopted by the  FCC
in May 1996, the FCC failed to identify the frequency 929.2125 MHz for which the
Company holds the System Licenses
    
 
                                       9
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
as  a  nationwide exclusive  CMRS paging  frequency that  will be  excluded from
geographic licensing and exempt from interim rules including a freeze on  filing
certain types of paging applications. The Company has sought reconsideration and
stay  of these  decisions and  it is  the Company's  position that  929.2125 MHz
should be considered a nationwide exclusive  CMRS frequency that is exempt  from
geographic licensing. The FCC has not yet acted on the Company's reconsideration
request,  its  stay request,  or  the final  rules  that will  determine whether
929.2125 MHz  will be  subject  to geographic  licensing.  Failure to  have  the
Company's 929.2125 MHz frequency for which the Company holds the System Licenses
identified  as a nationwide exclusive CMRS paging frequency (and, as a result of
such identification,  excluded from  geographic licensing  and exempt  from  the
freeze  on  filing  certain types  of  paging  applications) could  result  in a
material adverse effect on the Company. The Company can give no assurances  that
the  FCC will act  in accordance with  the Company's position.  See 'Business --
Regulation.'
    
 
     In light of  the FCC's  ability to utilize  auctions to  select from  among
competing  CMRS applications, and as a result of the FCC's proposal to institute
geographic licensing through auctions for one-way paging frequencies, there  can
be no assurance that the Company will be able to procure additional frequencies,
or  expand its existing  paging networks operating on  frequencies for which the
Company is  currently  licensed into  new  geographic areas.  The  Company  also
believes that the use of auctions for paging licenses may increase the number of
competitors  who have significant  financial resources and  may provide an added
incentive to build out authorized systems rapidly.
 
   
     Regulation of Foreign Ownership.  Under  existing law, no more than 20%  of
the  Company's capital stock may  be owned, directly or  indirectly, or voted by
non-U.S.  citizens  or  their  representatives,  a  foreign  government  or  its
representatives,  or a foreign  corporation, and foreign  ownership in excess of
these limits  could place  the  Company's licenses  in jeopardy.  The  Company's
certificate  of incorporation  authorizes the Board  of Directors  to adopt such
provisions as it deems necessary in  order to ensure compliance with the  rules,
regulations  and policies  of the FCC  (the 'FCC Rules').  These restrictions on
foreign ownership could  also adversely  affect the  ability of  the Company  to
attract  additional equity  financing from entities  that are, or  are owned by,
non-U.S. persons.  Currently, there  are  no foreign  holders of  the  Company's
Common  Stock. The Offerings  consist of two  tranches, an international tranche
and a domestic tranche. It  is anticipated that 880,000  shares will be sold  to
foreign  investors in the international tranche. Upon exercise of the Option and
consummation of the Offerings (assuming that 880,000 shares are sold to  foreign
investors),  it is  expected that approximately  8.6% of  the outstanding shares
will be owned by foreign holders. While  the Company intends to comply with  all
FCC requirements, there can be no assurance as to the level of foreign ownership
of    the   Common   Stock    as   a   result    of   secondary   trading.   See
'Business -- Regulation.'
    
 
SHIFTING MIX OF DISTRIBUTION CHANNELS
 
   
     Since 1992, the Company has  significantly shifted its mix of  distribution
channels  to resellers  and Company-owned  stores from  direct sales.  The shift
towards the reseller channel in particular has  in part led to a decline in  the
Company's  ARPU (calculated by dividing  services, rent and maintenance revenues
for the period by the applicable number of months in the period and dividing the
result by the average number of units  in service for the period) over the  last
three  years since  the Company  charges wholesale  service prices  to resellers
rather than the  higher retail prices  charged to end  users. This decrease  has
historically  been partially offset by lower  EXPU (calculated by dividing total
operating  expenses   before   depreciation  and   amortization   and   non-cash
compensation  expense for the period  by the applicable number  of months in the
period and dividing the result by the average number of units in service for the
period) resulting from the reseller bearing  a significant portion of the  costs
of  selling,  marketing,  administration  and  disconnections  related  to their
customers. To the  extent that the  Company's EXPU  does not decline  at a  rate
similar  to ARPU, the Company's financial results may be adversely affected. The
Company has  also experienced  a decline  in  the net  margin on  product  sales
(defined as product sales less cost of products sold) over the last three years.
In  addition to  increased competition in  the industry,  the Company attributes
this decline in part to its  increased use of the reseller distribution  channel
through which the Company has less flexibility in terms of the prices it charges
on  the sale of  pagers. See 'Management's Discussion  and Analysis of Financial
Conditions and Results of Operations' and 'Business -- Competition.'
    
 
                                       10
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
     As part of its expansion plans,  the Company intends to continue to  expand
its  distribution through  Company-owned stores.  The establishment  of numerous
additional Company-owned stores would represent a divergence from the  Company's
historical  operating policy and  experience and there can  be no assurance that
the Company's recent success in this channel of distribution will be maintained.
Because the Company  plans to  sell an increasing  number of  its units  through
Company-owned  stores, the Company's overall rate of disconnections may increase
since the Company expects  that subscribers who  purchase pagers through  retail
outlets  may  cancel  their  subscriptions at  a  higher  rate  than subscribers
obtained through other distribution channels.
 
   
ABILITY TO MANAGE GROWTH
    
 
   
     The Company has historically  grown at a faster  rate than the average  for
the  wireless messaging  industry. From 1991  to 1995,  the Company's subscriber
base grew at an average compound  annual growth rate of approximately 92%,  from
44,304 units in service to 607,725 units in service. During the same period, the
paging  industry as a  whole grew at  an average compound  annual growth rate of
26%, from  approximately 12  million units  in service  to 30  million units  in
service.  However, there can  be no assurance  that the Company  will be able to
continue  to  achieve  its  historical  growth  rate.  The  Company's  continued
expansion  will depend on,  among other things, the  Company's ability to access
new markets and customers, install facilities and open new Company-owned stores,
each in a  timely manner,  at reasonable  cost and  on terms  acceptable to  the
Company.  The Company's expansion  will also depend on,  among other things, its
access to funds for  required capital expenditures, the  ability to attract  and
retain  skilled  employees,  the  adaptability  of  the  Company's decentralized
operating structure  to more  regions as  the Company  implements its  expansion
plan,  and on the ability of the  Company's officers and key employees to manage
successfully rapid growth  and to implement  appropriate management  information
systems   and  controls.  The  Company's   inability  to  manage  its  expansion
effectively,  or  to  attract  and   retain  skilled  employees  and   implement
appropriate  systems and controls,  could have a material  adverse effect on the
Company's operations. See 'Business' and 'Management.' Historically, the Company
has grown internally. The Company may in the future make strategic  acquisitions
to  expand its  markets and  take advantage  of the  consolidation trend  in the
wireless messaging industry. There can be no assurance that future  acquisitions
can  be consummated on acceptable  terms or that any  acquired companies will be
successfully integrated into the Company's operations.
    
 
SUBSCRIBER TURNOVER
 
   
     The results of operations of  wireless messaging service providers such  as
the  Company  are  significantly affected  by  subscriber  disconnections, which
commonly are measured based upon a percentage of the Company's customer base. In
order to  realize  net  growth  in subscriber  units  in  service,  disconnected
subscribers  must be replaced and additional subscribers must be added. However,
because the sales and marketing costs associated with attracting new subscribers
are  substantial  relative  to  the  costs  of  providing  service  to  existing
subscribers,   disconnections   adversely  affect   the  Company's   results  of
operations. The Company's average monthly disconnect rate during the year  ended
December  31, 1995 and the  three months ended March  31, 1996 was approximately
1.1% and 1.3%, respectively, of its subscriber base for each period. The average
monthly disconnect rate for the paging  industry during the year ended  December
31,  1995  was  approximately  2.8%.  Although  the  Company  believes  that its
disconnect rate is below  the industry average, there  can be no assurance  that
the  Company will not  experience an increase  in its disconnect  rate which may
adversely affect the Company's results  of operations. In addition, because  the
Company  plans to sell  an increasing number of  its units through Company-owned
stores, the  Company's overall  rate of  disconnections may  increase since  the
Company expects that subscribers who purchase pagers through such retail outlets
may  tend  to  cancel their  subscriptions  at  a higher  rate  than subscribers
obtained through other distribution  channels. See 'Management's Discussion  and
Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations -- Overview.'
    
 
HISTORY OF NET LOSSES
 
     The  Company sustained  net losses of  $0.8 million, $2.9  million and $0.1
million for the years ended December 31, 1994 and 1995 and for the three  months
ended  March 31, 1996,  respectively, and expects to  incur additional losses in
the  future.  The  Company's  losses  have  resulted  primarily  from   interest
 
                                       11
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
expense  and  depreciation  expense  associated  with  capital  investments.  In
addition, the Company had an accumulated deficit of approximately $12.9  million
as of December 31, 1995. There can be no assurance that the Company will be able
to  operate profitably in the future. See 'Selected Consolidated Financial Data'
and 'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results  of
Operations.'
    
 
CONTROL BY PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
 
   
     Upon  completion of  the Offering, Leonard  DiSavino and  Philip Sacks, the
founders of the  Company, will  beneficially own an  aggregate of  approximately
41.1%  of the  outstanding shares  of Common  Stock (39.3%  if the Underwriters'
over-allotment options are exercised in  full). In addition, the Investors  will
own  in aggregate approximately 29.6% of  the outstanding shares of Common Stock
(28.3% if  the  Underwriters' over-allotment  options  are exercised  in  full).
Pursuant  to an  agreement with  the Investors  entered into  in connection with
purchase and sale  of the  Notes and  the Option  (the 'Investment  Agreement'),
Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks and the Investors have agreed to vote their shares of
Common  Stock  in order  to elect  to the  Board of  Directors (i)  four persons
designated by Messrs. DiSavino  and Sacks and (ii)  three persons designated  by
certain of the Investors. Thus, the Investment Agreement gives the Investors and
Messrs.  DiSavino and Sacks  control of the  Board of Directors  of the Company.
Furthermore, the Investors will give  Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks an  irrevocable
proxy to vote approximately 17.3% of the Common Stock of the Company held by the
Investors.  As a result of the foregoing, such  parties will be in a position to
control the  affairs  and  management  of  the  Company.  See  'Management'  and
'Principal Stockholders.'
    
 
DEPENDENCE ON KEY PERSONNEL
 
   
     The  success of the  Company will depend  to a significant  extent upon the
active participation and experience of its management. The loss of the  services
of any of Leonard DiSavino, the Company's President and Chief Executive Officer,
Philip  Sacks, the  Company's Chief  Operating Officer,  or Mitchell  Sacks, the
Company's Executive Vice  President -- Operations  and Chief Financial  Officer,
could adversely affect the Company's business. Prior to or concurrently with the
closing  of the Offerings, the Company will enter into employment agreements and
has already entered  into non-competition  agreements with  these officers.  The
Company  has not obtained  key-man life insurance  on any of  its key management
employees. See 'Management.'
    
 
DEPENDENCE ON KEY SUPPLIERS
 
     The Company  does  not  manufacture  any of  the  pagers,  transmitters  or
switches used in its operations. The Company currently obtains substantially all
of  its pagers  from Motorola,  Inc. ('Motorola'),  the worldwide  leading pager
manufacturer. The Company purchases its transmitters from Motorola and  Glenayre
Electronics,  Inc. ('Glenayre'),  a leading  manufacturer of  wireless messaging
equipment, and substantially  all of  its computerized  messaging switches  from
Glenayre. Although pagers, transmitters and switches are available from a number
of vendors, the Company concentrates its purchases with certain vendors in order
to achieve purchasing economies, which results in its dependence on Motorola and
Glenayre  for the  timely delivery  of its  pager inventory  and transmitter and
switching equipment. To date, the Company has not experienced significant delays
in obtaining pagers, transmitters or wireless messaging switches, but there  can
be  no assurance  that it  will not  experience such  delays in  the future. The
Company cannot predict what impact, if any, such delays may have on its  ability
to compete in its markets.
 
DILUTION
 
   
     The  Company's existing stockholders acquired  their shares of Common Stock
at a cost substantially  below the initial public  offering price. The  Dividend
paid to the Founding Stockholders and the accrual of deferred tax liabilities in
connection  with the  conversion of  the Company  from an  S Corporation  to a C
Corporation will result  in a decrease  in the  net tangible book  value of  the
Company.  Accordingly, purchasers of the shares  of Common Stock will experience
immediate dilution  in net  tangible book  value per  share of  Common Stock  of
$15.68 from the initial public offering price per share. See 'Dilution.'
    
 
                                       12
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
   
     Upon  completion of the Offerings, the  Company will have 14,988,232 shares
of Common Stock outstanding. Of these  shares, the 4,400,000 shares sold in  the
Offerings  (5,060,000  shares if  the  Underwriters' over-allotment  options are
exercised in full)  will be  freely tradeable. The  remaining 10,588,232  shares
will  continue  to be  'restricted  shares' as  defined  in Rule  144  under the
Securities Act  of 1933,  as  amended (the  'Securities  Act'). Any  person  (or
persons whose shares are aggregated) who is not deemed to have been an affiliate
of  the Company at  any time during  the 90 days  preceding a sale,  and who has
beneficially owned shares  for at  least three  years (including  any period  of
ownership  of preceding non-affiliated  holders), will be  entitled to sell such
shares under Rule  144(k) without regard  to the volume  limitations, manner  of
sale  provisions, public information requirements or notice requirements of Rule
144. Such shares  may not be  resold in  the absence of  registration under  the
Securities  Act  or pursuant  to exemptions  from such  registration, including,
among others,  the exemption  provided by  Rule 144  under the  Securities  Act.
Certain  stockholders have registration rights with respect to all of the shares
owned by them and  management has been  granted certain incidental  registration
rights.
    
 
   
     The  Company, the Investors and certain holders of approximately 10,588,232
shares, including all holders who are directors or officers of the Company, have
agreed, subject to  certain exceptions, not  to sell, offer  to sell, grant  any
option  for the sale  of or otherwise dispose  of any shares  of Common Stock or
securities convertible  into or  exercisable or  exchangeable for  Common  Stock
(except  for the shares offered hereby) for a  period of 180 days after the date
of this  Prospectus without  the written  consent of  Lehman Brothers  Inc.  See
'Underwriting' and 'Shares Eligible for Future Sale.'
    
 
     No  prediction can be made  as to the effect, if  any, that future sales of
shares, or the availability of shares for  future sale, will have on the  market
price  of the Common  Stock prevailing from  time to time.  Sales of substantial
amounts of Common  Stock (including  shares issued  upon the  exercise of  stock
options),  or the perception that such sales could occur, could adversely affect
prevailing market prices for the Common  Stock. If such sales reduce the  market
price  of the Common Stock, the Company's ability to raise additional capital in
the equity markets could be adversely affected.
 
NO PRIOR MARKET FOR COMMON STOCK; POSSIBLE VOLATILITY OF STOCK PRICE
 
     Prior to  the Offerings  there has  been no  public market  for the  Common
Stock. Although application has been made to list the Common Stock on the Nasdaq
National  Market, there can be  no assurance that an  active trading market will
develop or be sustained. The initial public offering price will be determined by
negotiations among the Company and  representatives of the Underwriters and  may
not  be  indicative of  the price  at which  the Common  Stock will  trade after
completion of the Offerings. See 'Underwriting.' There can be no assurances that
a purchaser of Common Stock in the  Offerings will be able to resell the  Common
Stock  at or above the initial public  offering price. In addition, factors such
as variations  in  the  Company's  actual  and  anticipated  operating  results,
announcements  by the Company or others  and developments affecting the Company,
could cause the  market price of  the Common Stock  to fluctuate  significantly.
Broad market fluctuations, market changes in the wireless communications sector,
interest rate changes and general economic and political conditions, among other
factors,  also  may  adversely affect  the  market  price of  the  Common Stock,
regardless of the Company's performance.
 
ANTI-TAKEOVER EFFECT AND OTHER PROVISIONS OF THE CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION
 
     Certain provisions  of  the  Company's Certificate  of  Incorporation  (the
'Certificate  of  Incorporation')  and  By-laws  (the  'By-laws'),  as  well  as
provisions of  the  Delaware General  Corporate  Law,  may have  the  effect  of
discouraging  or preventing certain types of transactions involving an actual or
potential change in control of the Company, including transactions in which  the
stockholders  might  otherwise  receive a  premium  for their  shares  over then
current market prices. Upon  consummation of the  Offerings, the Certificate  of
Incorporation  of the Company will contain a provision that divides the Board of
Directors into three  classes, with one  class having  a term of  one year,  one
class  having a term of two years and one class having a term of three years. At
each annual meeting of stockholders, directors will be elected to succeed  those
directors  whose terms have expired, and  each newly elected director will serve
for a  three-year  term. Such  classified  board provision  would  decrease  the
ability to
 
                                       13
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
remove incumbent directors from their positions on the Board of Directors in the
event  of  a takeover  of  the Company.  The  Certificate of  Incorporation also
restricts alien  ownership and  voting  of the  capital  stock of  the  Company.
Finally,  the  Board  of Directors  has  the  authority to  fix  the  rights and
preferences of and issue shares of preferred stock, which may have the effect of
delaying or preventing a change in control of the Company without action by  the
stockholders.  See 'Description  of Capital  Stock --  Delaware Law  and Certain
Certificate of Incorporation and By-law Provisions.'
 
DIVIDEND POLICY
 
     Except for the  Dividend and certain  distributions to stockholders  during
the  period it was an S Corporation for  the payment of tax liabilities, in lieu
of salaries  or to  provide the  Founding Stockholders  with a  return of  their
capital,  the Company has not paid any dividends on its Common Stock, intends to
retain all future earnings for the  operation and expansion of its business  and
does  not anticipate declaring and paying cash  dividends on the Common Stock at
any time in the foreseeable future.  Any future determination as to the  payment
of  cash  dividends  will  depend  upon  the  Company's  results  of operations,
financial condition and capital requirements, as  well as such other factors  as
the Board of Directors may consider. In addition, the Company's revolving credit
and term loan agreement contains certain covenants which restrict the payment of
dividends  by the Company or any of  its subsidiaries. See 'Dividend Policy' and
'Management's Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results  of
Operations -- Liquidity and Capital Resources.'
 
FORWARD-LOOKING STATEMENTS
 
     This  Prospectus contains certain forward-looking statements concerning the
Company's operations, economic performance  and financial condition,  including,
in  particular,  the  likelihood  of the  Company's  success  in  developing and
expanding its business. These statements are based upon a number of  assumptions
and  estimates  which are  inherently subject  to significant  uncertainties and
contingencies, many of which are beyond the control of the Company, and  reflect
future business decisions which are subject to change. Some of these assumptions
inevitably  will not materialize, and unanticipated events will occur which will
affect the Company's results.  Consequently, actual results  will vary from  the
statements  contained herein  and such  variance may  be, and  is likely  to be,
material. Prospective  investors  are therefore  cautioned  not to  place  undue
reliance on this information.
 
                                       14
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                  THE COMPANY
 
     Background.   The  Company's predecessor, Tri-State  Radio Corporation, was
formed in 1974 by the Company's founders, Leonard DiSavino and Philip Sacks,  to
acquire   a  wireless   communications  company  which   operated  primarily  in
Pennsylvania, New  Jersey  and  Delaware. The  Company's  current  business  was
established  by Messrs.  DiSavino and  Sacks in 1987  following the  sale of the
majority of  the Company's  original  operations. Since  1987, the  Company  has
operated primarily in two regions, the Northeast, including metropolitan markets
in  New  York,  Connecticut, New  Jersey,  Massachusetts,  eastern Pennsylvania,
Maryland and  Washington, D.C.,  and the  West, including  certain  metropolitan
markets in California, Arizona and Nevada. Until 1995, the Company conducted its
business   through  a  number  of  related   subchapter  S  Corporations  and  a
partnership, all of  the common stock  and partnership interests  of which  were
owned by Leonard DiSavino and Philip Sacks and certain trusts for the benefit of
their respective children.
 
   
     In  July 1995,  the Investors  purchased from  Leonard DiSavino  and Philip
Sacks (i) the Notes, which are the non-recourse obligations of Messrs.  DiSavino
and  Sacks,  and  (ii) the  Option  for $1  million  to purchase  40.66%  of the
fully-diluted common  stock of  the Company  from the  Founding Stockholders  in
exchange for a portion of the Notes. The Investors intend to exercise the Option
simultaneously with the consummation of the Offerings. A portion of the proceeds
from  the  Offerings will  be  used to  pay the  $35.0  million Dividend  to the
Founding Stockholders, and  all of such  $35.0 million payment  will be used  by
Messrs.  DiSavino and Sacks to repay in  part the Notes. After such payment, the
remaining obligations under the Notes will  be satisfied in connection with  the
exercise  of the  Option. See 'Use  of Proceeds' and  'Certain Relationships and
Related Party Transactions.'
    
 
     In September 1995, all  of the related S  Corporations and the  partnership
were  merged (the 'Merger')  with or into  the Company, with  the Company as the
surviving S Corporation. In connection with the Merger, the Company changed  its
name  to TSR Paging  Inc. The Company  is a Delaware  corporation. The Company's
principal offices are located at 400  Kelby Street, Fort Lee, New Jersey  07024,
and its telephone number is (201) 947-5300.
 
     Reorganized  Corporate Structure  and S Corporation  Status.   Prior to the
Offerings, the Company was an S Corporation subject to taxation under Subchapter
S of the Internal Revenue Code. As a result, the net income of the Company,  for
federal  (and some state) income  tax purposes, has been  reported by, and taxed
directly to,  the  Company's  stockholders  rather  than  to  the  Company.  The
Company's   S  Corporation  status  will  terminate  immediately  prior  to  the
consummation of  the Offerings  and  the Company  will  become a  C  Corporation
subject to corporate income taxation. In connection with the Company's change in
status  to  a  C  Corporation,  the Company  will  incur  a  one-time  charge to
stockholders' equity  for deferred  tax  liabilities of  approximately  $347,000
reflecting  differences  between  book  and  tax  accounting  for  depreciation,
inventory and certain reserves. No adverse  tax consequences to the persons  who
become  stockholders in the Offerings are expected to result from termination of
the Company's S corporation status.
 
     The Company  (including the  related subchapter  S corporations)  has  paid
distributions  to  its  stockholders to  enable  them  to pay  their  income tax
liability as a result of  the Company's status as an  S corporation, in lieu  of
salaries and, from time to time, to provide them with a return on their capital.
The  aggregate  amounts of  these  distributions were  $747,436,  $1,326,275 and
$1,321,374 in  each  of  the years  ended  December  31, 1993,  1994  and  1995,
respectively.  Effective October 1,  1995, the salaries  of Messrs. DiSavino and
Philip Sacks  were established  at  $300,000 per  annum with  subsequent  salary
amounts  based on the  Company's budget as  approved by the  Board of Directors.
Payments with  respect to  the Company's  income (as  measured under  the  rules
governing   S  corporations  under  the  Code)  may  be  made  to  the  Founding
Stockholders pursuant  to  a tax  indemnification  agreement or,  under  certain
circumstances,  the Founding Stockholders could be  required to make payments to
the Company pursuant to such  agreement. See 'Certain Relationships and  Related
Party Transactions -- Tax Indemnification Agreement.'
 
                                       15
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                USE OF PROCEEDS
 
   
     The  net proceeds  to the  Company from the  Offerings are  estimated to be
approximately  $68.8   million   (or   $79.2  million   if   the   Underwriters'
over-allotment  options  are  exercised  in full),  assuming  an  initial public
offering price of $17.00 per share (based upon the midpoint of the filing  range
set  forth on the  cover page of this  Prospectus), after deducting underwriting
discounts and the estimated offering expenses payable by the Company.
    
 
   
     Approximately $35.0 million of  the net proceeds of  the Offerings will  be
used  to pay the  Dividend to the  Founding Stockholders, all  of which payment,
together with the  proceeds from the  exercise of  the Option, will  be used  by
Messrs.  DiSavino and Sacks  to repay the Notes.  See 'Certain Relationships and
Related Party Transactions.'
    
 
   
     The remainder of the  net proceeds of  the Offerings will  be used to  fund
geographic  and  system  expansion.  The Company's  planned  expansion  into new
geographic  regions  will  include  the   purchase  of  new  paging   equipment,
transmitters,  satellite networking equipment and other capital expenditures, as
well as potential acquisitions, including  the acquisition of licenses or  radio
spectrum  to expand  or enhance  its services.  Although the  Company expects to
evaluate potential acquisitions  in the  future, it  does not  have any  present
agreements or commitments with respect to any acquisition. The Company estimates
that   it  will  require  approximately   $60.0  million  in  aggregate  capital
expenditures during 1996 and 1997 to fund this expansion. The Company intends to
utilize its existing Credit  Agreement (as defined  below) and any  refinancings
thereof,  together  with cash  flow  from operations  and  the remainder  of the
proceeds of the Offerings,  to complete its expansion  program. There can be  no
assurance  that the Company  will be able  to refinance its  Credit Agreement or
have  access  to  substitute  capital  on  acceptable  terms.  In  addition,  as
opportunities are presented to the Company and as conditions change, the Company
may alter its capital programs in light of such opportunities or conditions. See
'Management's  Discussion  and Analysis  of Financial  Condition and  Results of
Operations --  Liquidity  and  Capital  Resources.' The  Company  may  also  use
proceeds of the Offerings for working capital and general corporate purposes.
    
 
   
     Pending  the use of funds for  geographic and system expansion as described
above, approximately $33.8 million of the net proceeds of the Offerings will  be
used  to repay outstanding revolving indebtedness  under an amended and restated
credit agreement (the 'Credit Agreement') among the Company, the First  National
Bank  of Chicago, N.A. and certain other lenders. At March 31, 1996, the Company
had an outstanding  balance under  the Credit Agreement  of approximately  $43.8
million  and  the  effective  annual interest  rate  thereunder  was  6.42%. The
commitments under the  Credit Agreement  will terminate  on June  30, 1997.  Any
outstanding  balances under the Credit Agreement at June 30, 1997 must be repaid
according  to  a  specific  schedule  in  quarterly  installments  beginning  on
September  30,  1997 and  continuing until  June 30,  2002. See  'Description of
Certain Indebtedness -- Credit Agreement.'
    
 
                                DIVIDEND POLICY
 
     Except for the  Dividend and certain  distributions to stockholders  during
the  period it was an S Corporation for  the payment of tax liabilities, in lieu
of salaries  or to  provide the  Founding Stockholders  with a  return of  their
capital,  the Company has not paid any dividends on its Common Stock, intends to
retain all future earnings for the  operation and expansion of its business  and
does  not anticipate declaring and paying cash  dividends on the Common Stock at
any time  in the  foreseeable  future. The  decision  whether to  apply  legally
available  funds to the payment of dividends on the Common Stock will be made by
the Board of Directors of the Company from  time to time in the exercise of  its
business  judgment,  taking  into  account, among  other  things,  the Company's
results of operations  and financial  condition, any then  existing or  proposed
commitments  for the use  by the Company  of available funds,  and the Company's
obligations with  respect  to  any  then outstanding  class  or  series  of  its
preferred  stock.  See 'The  Company --  Reorganized  Corporate Structure  and S
Corporation Status.'
 
     The Company is restricted by the terms of the Credit Agreement from  paying
cash  dividends on its  Common Stock, and may  in the future  enter into loan or
other agreements or issue debt securities  or preferred stock that restrict  the
payment  of cash  dividends on  Common Stock.  See 'Management's  Discussion and
Analysis of  Financial Condition  and  Results of  Operations --  Liquidity  and
Capital Resources' and 'Description of Certain Indebtedness.'
 
                                       16
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                    DILUTION
 
   
     The net tangible book value of the Company's Common Stock at March 31, 1996
was  a deficit of approximately $13.7 million, or $1.29 per share. 'Net tangible
book value' per share represents the amount of total tangible assets less  total
liabilities,  divided by the number of shares of Common Stock outstanding. After
giving effect to the (i) payment of the Dividend, (ii) conversion of the Company
from an  S corporation  to a  C corporation  and (iii)  sale by  the Company  of
4,400,000  shares of Common Stock at an assumed initial public offering price of
$17.00 per share (based upon the mid-point of the filing range set forth on  the
cover page of this Prospectus) and the application of the estimated net proceeds
therefrom,  the pro forma  net tangible book  value of the  Company at March 31,
1996  would  have  been  approximately  $19.8  million,  or  $1.32  per   share,
representing an immediate increase in net tangible book value of $2.61 per share
to  existing stockholders and an  immediate dilution of $15.68  per share to new
investors. The table below illustrates this per share dilution.
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                                     <C>       <C>
Initial public offering price per share.......................................................    $17.00
                                                                                                  ------
     Net tangible book value (deficit) per common share before the Offerings.........   $(1.29)
     Dividend to Founding Stockholders...............................................    (2.34)
     Conversion of the Company from an S corporation to a C corporation..............    (0.02)
     Increase per common share attributable to the Offerings.........................     4.07
                                                                                        ------
 
Pro forma net tangible book value per common share after the Offerings........................      1.32
                                                                                                  ------
Dilution per common share to new investors....................................................    $15.68
                                                                                                  ------
                                                                                                  ------
</TABLE>
    
 
   
     The above calculations do not give effect to the exercise of stock  options
outstanding  at March  31, 1996.  As of that  date, the  Company had outstanding
options to purchase 316,407 shares of  Common Stock under its stock option  plan
at  a weighted  average exercise price  of $8.50  per share. To  the extent that
certain of these  options are exercised,  there may be  further dilution to  new
investors.
    
 
   
     The  following table sets forth on a pro  forma basis as of March 31, 1996,
the differences between  the existing  stockholders and the  new investors  with
respect  to the number of shares of Common Stock purchased from the Company, the
total consideration paid to the Company and the average price per share paid  by
existing  stockholders and new investors (at  an assumed initial public offering
price of $17.00 per share  before deducting underwriting discounts and  offering
expenses payable by the Company).
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                SHARES PURCHASED           TOTAL CONSIDERATION
                                              ---------------------      -----------------------      AVERAGE PRICE
                                                NUMBER      PERCENT         AMOUNT       PERCENT        PER SHARE
                                              ----------    -------      ------------    -------      -------------
<S>                                           <C>           <C>          <C>             <C>          <C>
Founding Stockholders......................    6,154,406      41.0%      $    394,688       0.3%         $  0.06
Investors..................................    4,433,826      29.6         35,000,000      31.8             8.13
New investors..............................    4,400,000      29.4         74,800,000      67.9            17.00
                                              ----------    -------      ------------    -------
Total......................................   14,988,232     100.0%      $110,195,688     100.0%
                                              ----------    -------      ------------    -------
                                              ----------    -------      ------------    -------
</TABLE>
    
 
                                       17
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                 CAPITALIZATION
 
     The  following  table sets  forth  the cash  and  cash equivalents  and the
capitalization of the Company at March 31, 1996, (i) on an actual basis and (ii)
as adjusted to give effect to the Offerings, the payment of the Dividend and the
conversion of  the  Company  from an  S  corporation  to a  C  corporation.  The
information  below should be  read in conjunction  with 'Management's Discussion
and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations' and the Company's
historical financial statements and the notes thereto included elsewhere in this
Prospectus.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                           MARCH 31, 1996
                                                                                  --------------------------------
                                                                                                      PRO FORMA
                                                                                      ACTUAL        AS ADJUSTED(1)
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
                                                                                           (IN THOUSANDS)
<S>                                                                               <C>               <C>
Cash and cash equivalents......................................................   $          116    $       33,930
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
 
Long-term debt:
     Borrowings under the Credit Agreement.....................................   $       43,750    $       43,750
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
 
          Total long-term debt.................................................   $       43,750    $       43,750
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
Stockholders' equity (deficit):
     Common Stock ($.01 par value, 20,000,000 shares authorized, 10,588,232
       shares issued and outstanding at March 31, 1996 and 14,988,232 shares
       issued and outstanding pro forma as adjusted)...........................              106               150
     Additional paid-in capital................................................              992            34,762
     Accumulated deficit.......................................................          (12,922)          (13,269)
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
          Total stockholders' equity (deficit).................................          (11,824)           21,643
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
          Total capitalization.................................................   $       31,926    $       65,393
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
                                                                                  --------------    --------------
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------
 
   
(1) The Pro  Forma As  Adjusted  amounts reflect  (i)  the consummation  of  the
    Offerings,  (ii) the payment  of the Dividend  and (iii) the  recording of a
    deferred tax liability of $347,000  to reflect differences between book  and
    tax  accounting for depreciation, inventory and certain reserves as a result
    of the conversion of the Company from  an S corporation to a C  corporation.
    It has been assumed that the net proceeds have been applied to cash and cash
    equivalents  pending the use of such  proceeds fo fund geographic and system
    expansion.
    
 
                                       18
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                     SELECTED FINANCIAL AND OPERATING DATA
 
     The following table sets forth financial data for the years ended  December
31,  1991 and  December 31,  1992, which  have been  derived from  the Company's
financial statements, audited  by Cummings &  Carroll, P.C., independent  public
accountants,  and for the years  ended December 31, 1993,  December 31, 1994 and
December  31,  1995  which  have  been  derived  from  the  Company's  financial
statements,  audited  by Arthur  Andersen  LLP, independent  public accountants,
whose report thereon  is included  elsewhere in this  Prospectus. The  following
financial data for the three months ended March 31, 1995 and March 31, 1996 have
been  derived from the Company's unaudited condensed financial statements which,
in the opinion of management, contain all adjustments (consisting of normal  and
recurring  adjustments)  necessary  to present  fairly  the  Company's financial
position and  results of  operations at  such dates  and for  such periods.  The
interim  results are not necessarily indicative of the results of operations for
the entire year. The  data presented below should  be read in conjunction  with,
and  is qualified in its entirety by  reference to, the Financial Statements and
the Notes  thereto  appearing elsewhere  in  this Prospectus  and  'Management's
Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations.'
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                  THREE MONTHS
                                                               YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,                          ENDED MARCH 31,
                                             -----------------------------------------------------------      --------------------
                                              1991         1992         1993         1994         1995         1995         1996
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
                                                                     (IN THOUSANDS, EXCEPT PER SHARE DATA)
<S>                                          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>          <C>
STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS DATA:
Revenues:
  Services, rent and maintenance........     $ 7,130      $ 8,500      $11,119      $17,954      $28,908      $ 6,308      $ 9,937
  Product sales.........................         809        1,586        8,481       14,088       18,615        3,931        4,954
  Cost of products sold.................        (453)        (857)      (5,098)     (10,520)     (14,549)      (3,094)      (3,949)
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
    Net revenues........................       7,486        9,229       14,502       21,522       32,974        7,145       10,942
Services, rent and maintenance
  expenses..............................       1,678        1,888        2,748        4,592        7,060        1,575        2,308
Selling and marketing expenses..........       1,562        1,810        1,814        3,332        5,399        1,178        1,771
General and administrative expenses.....       2,295        2,560        3,377        5,165        8,719        1,943        3,422
Depreciation and amortization...........       1,977        2,741        6,758        7,578       10,870        2,179        2,892
Non-cash compensation expense(1)........           0            0            0            0            0            0          747
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
Operating income (loss).................         (26)         230         (195)         855          926          270         (198)
Other expense...........................           0            0            0            0          163            0            0
Interest expense........................         600          548          517        1,024        2,484          522          638
Unusual item(2).........................           0            0            0          590          564            0            0
Income tax provision (benefit)..........           0            0            0           32           49            0            5
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
  Loss from continuing operations before
    discontinued operations and
    extraordinary item..................        (626)        (318)        (712)        (791)      (2,334)        (252)        (841)
Discontinued operations and
  extraordinary item(3).................           0            0            0            0          612            0            0
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
  Net loss..............................     $  (626)     $  (318)     $  (712)     $  (791)     $(2,946)     $  (252)     $  (841)
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
                                             -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------      -------
Pro forma loss from continuing
  operations before discontinued
  operations and extraordinary
  item(4)...............................                                                         $(2,284)                  $  (836)
Pro forma loss per common share from
  continuing operations before
  discontinued operations and
  extraordinary item(4).................                                                         $ (0.18)                  $ (0.07)
Weighted average shares outstanding.....                                                          12,805                    12,805
 
OTHER DATA:
EBITDA(5)...............................     $ 1,951      $ 2,971      $ 6,563      $ 8,433      $11,796      $ 2,449      $ 3,441
EBITDA margin(6)........................        26.1%        32.2%        45.3%        39.2%        35.8%        34.3%        31.4%
Average monthly revenue per unit(7).....     $ 17.65      $ 12.77      $  8.00      $  6.18      $  5.20      $  6.11      $  5.08
Average monthly operating expense per
  unit(8)...............................       11.70         9.40         5.71         4.50         3.81         4.55         3.83
Units in service (at end of period).....      44,304       66,674      164,883      319,687      607,725      368,767      696,623
Units in service per employee (at end of
  period)(9)............................         642          901        1,633        1,648        1,905        1,748        1,819
Selling and marketing expenses per net
  subscriber additions(10)..............     $157.03      $ 80.91      $ 18.47      $ 21.52      $ 18.74      $ 24.00      $ 19.92
Capital expenditures....................       2,234        4,288       10,969       13,160       20,643        2,777        7,252
</TABLE>
    
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                             MARCH 31, 1996
                                                                                                       ---------------------------
                                                                                                                      PRO FORMA
                                                                                                        ACTUAL     AS ADJUSTED(11)
                                                                                                       --------    ---------------
<S>                                                                                                    <C>         <C>
BALANCE SHEET DATA:
Cash and cash equivalents...........................................................................   $    116        $33,930
Total assets........................................................................................     42,456         76,270
Total long-term debt (including current maturities).................................................     43,750         43,750
Total stockholders' equity (deficit)................................................................    (11,824)        21,643
</TABLE>
    
 
                                                        (Footnotes on next page)
 
                                       19
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
 (1) During  1992  and 1993,  the Company  granted  to certain  employees equity
     interests which were to be realized upon the occurrence of certain  events.
     Effective  January 1, 1996, these equity  interests were cancelled and such
     employees were  issued 168,900  units under  the Phantom  Stock Plan  at  a
     strike  price of $0, vest over a five-year period from the original date of
     grant in 1992 or 1993, as applicable, and had a grant date value of $6  per
     unit.  The  employees  received  credit for  vesting  through  the  date of
     cancellation of  the equity  interests. In  addition, on  January 1,  1996,
     150,350  units were issued under the Phantom  Stock Plan, at a strike price
     of $6  per unit  and vest  over a  five-year period.  As determined  by  an
     independent  investment  bank  valuation  and  the  Company's  Compensation
     Committee the per unit value  on January 1, 1996 was  $6. As a result,  the
     financial  statements for  the three  months ended  March 31,  1996 reflect
     non-cash compensation  expense  of  $747,000  (which  amount  includes  the
     cumulative  effect of the  vesting from 1992  forward) with a corresponding
     credit to additional paid-in-capital.  The remaining non-cash  compensation
     expense  of $266,000 will  be recognized by  the Company over  the next two
     years. In connection with the Offerings, the above units will be  converted
     to  options under  the TSR  Paging Inc.  Employee Option  Plan. Assuming an
     initial public offering price of $17.00  per share, the units will  convert
     to a total of 316,407 options at an exercise price of $8.50 per share.
    
 
    Holders  of Units under the  Plan will not have  the rights or privileges of
    stockholders of the Company.
 
 (2) The unusual  item  of  $590,000  in  1994  primarily  consists  of  certain
     financing  costs  associated with  the  commencement of  an  initial public
     offering which  was terminated  prior to  completion. The  unusual item  of
     $564,000  in 1995  primarily consists  of costs  related to  certain merger
     activity.
 
 (3) The discontinued operations charge of $300,000 consists of costs related to
     the  discontinuation   of  the   Company's  telephone   answering   service
     operations.  The extraordinary item of $312,000 is related to the write-off
     of deferred  financing  costs  following  the  refinancing  of  the  Credit
     Agreement.
 
   
 (4) Following  termination of  the Company's  status as  an S  Corporation upon
     consummation of the  Offerings, the  Company will be  subject to  corporate
     income  taxation. Accordingly,  pro forma  loss reflects  Federal and state
     income taxes as if the  Company had been a C  Corporation based on the  tax
     rates  that were in effect during the periods presented. See 'The Company.'
     The  pro  forma  statement  of   operations  data  does  not  reflect   (i)
     distributions  to Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks that,  if the Company were a C
     corporation, would be recorded as  compensation expense by the Company  and
     (ii)  reductions in interest expense relating  to the paydown of borrowings
     under the Company's revolving  credit facility, as  it is anticipated  that
     the  Company will reborrow such amounts to fund its expansion strategy. Pro
     forma loss  including  discontinued operations  before  extraordinary  item
     would  have been $(.20) per  share and $(.07) per  share for the year ended
     December 31, 1995 and the three months ended March 31, 1996,  respectively.
     Pro  forma loss  including discontinued  operations and  extraordinary item
     would have been $(.23) per  share and $(.07) per  share for the year  ended
     December 31, 1995 and the three months ended March 31, 1996, respectively.
    
 
   
 (5) EBITDA  represents operating income plus  depreciation and amortization and
     non-cash compensation expense. EBITDA is a financial measure commonly  used
     in  the Company's industry and is not  intended to represent cash flows for
     the period, nor has it been presented as an alternative to operating income
     or as an indicator of operating performance and should not be considered in
     isolation or  as  a substitute  for  measures of  performance  prepared  in
     accordance  with generally  accepted accounting  principles. EBITDA  is not
     determined in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. See
     'Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of
     Operations' and the  Financial Statements and  the Notes thereto  appearing
     elsewhere in this Prospectus.
    
 
 (6) EBITDA  margin is  calculated by dividing  (a) EBITDA by  (b) net revenues.
     EBITDA margin is a  measure commonly used in  the Company's industry as  an
     indicator of the efficiency of the Company's operations.
 
   
 (7) ARPU  is calculated by dividing (a) services, rent and maintenance revenues
     for the period by (b)  the applicable number of  months in the period,  and
     dividing  the result by (c) the average  number of units in service for the
     period.
    
 
   
 (8) EXPU  is  calculated  by  dividing  (a)  total  operating  expenses  before
     depreciation  and amortization  and non-cash  compensation expense  for the
     period by (b) the applicable number  of months in the period, and  dividing
     the result by (c) the average number of units in service for the period.
    
 
 (9) Employees  at the end  of the period includes  all full-time employees plus
     part-time employees divided by two, excluding employees associated with the
     Company's discontinued operations.
 
   
(10) Selling and marketing expenses per  net subscriber additions is  calculated
     by  dividing (a) selling and  marketing expenses for the  period by (b) the
     net change in units in service during such period.
    
 
   
(11) The Pro  Forma As  Adjusted amounts  reflect (i)  the consummation  of  the
     Offerings,  (ii) the payment of  the Dividend and (iii)  the recording of a
     deferred tax liability of $347,000 to reflect differences between book  and
     tax accounting for depreciation, inventory and certain reserves as a result
     of  the conversion of the Company from an S Corporation to a C Corporation.
     It has been assumed  that the net  proceeds have been  applied to cash  and
     cash  equivalents pending the  use of such proceeds  to fund geographic and
     system expansion.
    
 
                                       20





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      MANAGEMENT'S DISCUSSION AND ANALYSIS
                OF FINANCIAL CONDITION AND RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
 
     The  following  discussion  of  the  financial  condition  and  results  of
operations of the Company for the three years ended December 31, 1995 should  be
read in conjunction with the audited financial statements of the Company and the
notes thereto.
 
OVERVIEW
 
     The  Company builds and operates  wireless messaging systems, and generates
revenues primarily from the  provision of wireless messaging  services and to  a
lesser   extent  from  the   sale  of  wireless   communications  equipment  and
accessories. The Company's predecessor, founded  by Leonard DiSavino and  Philip
Sacks  in 1974 to acquire a  wireless communications company, operated primarily
in Pennsylvania, New  Jersey and  Delaware. The Company's  current business  was
established  by the founders in  1987 following the sale  of the majority of the
Company's original operations. Since 1987, the Company has operated primarily in
two  regions;  the  Northeast,  including  metropolitan  markets  in  New  York,
Connecticut,  New  Jersey,  Massachusetts,  eastern  Pennsylvania,  Maryland and
Washington, D.C.;  and  the  West, including  certain  metropolitan  markets  in
California, Arizona and Nevada.
 
   
     Traditional 'paging' service involves a signalling or alerting service that
typically  prompts a  user to  telephone a  given telephone  number. The Company
refers to its services as 'wireless messaging' services to distinguish them from
paging  services,  since  wireless  messaging  allows  subscribers  to   receive
communications  in the form  of alpha and numeric  text, as well  as acting as a
conventional alerting service. Developments in messaging technology have enabled
wireless messaging providers such as the Company to transmit more information at
a relatively higher speed, including alphanumeric messages.
    
 
   
     The  wireless  messaging  industry  is  currently  undergoing   significant
consolidation   as  various  participants  seek  to  accomplish  growth  through
acquisitions. Consolidation allows larger companies to garner economies of scale
and thus makes it more difficult for smaller companies to compete  successfully.
See 'Risk Factors -- Competition; Consolidation of Industry.'
    
 
     The  Company's  historical  financial  results include  the  accounts  of a
partnership and six related  S corporations. In August  1995, all such  entities
merged  into the Company, with the Company as the surviving S corporation. Prior
to the Offerings, the Company  was not subject to  federal income taxes and  was
subject  to state  taxes only  in certain  states. The  Company's pro  forma net
income  (loss)  for  the  years  ended   December  31,  1993,  1994  and   1995,
respectively,  and for the three  months ended March 31,  1995 and 1996 has been
computed as if the Company  had been subject to  Federal and state income  taxes
for the respective periods presented.
 
   
     The  Company's long-term operating objectives are to continue to expand its
business operations by providing wireless messaging services to a broad base  of
subscribers  throughout the  U.S. at  the same  time as  achieving its operating
profitability and  cash  flow growth  targets.  The Company  believes  operating
expenses  per unit in service and units in service per employee are key measures
of operating efficiency. The Company's average monthly operating costs per  unit
were  $5.71, $4.50  and $3.81, and  the number  of units in  service per Company
employee was 1,633, 1,648  and 1,905 for  the years ended  1993, 1994 and  1995,
respectively.  The  Company  seeks  to  improve  efficiency  through  increasing
penetration in existing markets and  through expansion into contiguous  markets.
The  Company has  grown rapidly  over the last  five years,  all from internally
generated growth. From 1991 to 1995, the number of units serviced by the Company
increased at an annual compound growth rate of 92.4% to 607,725 at December  31,
1995.  The Company's substantial  growth has been generated  by a combination of
factors, including (i) the use by the  Company of a diverse mix of  distribution
channels;  (ii) the conversion  and expansion of the  Company's networks to wide
area 900 MHz transmission systems; and (iii) expansion of the geographic regions
covered by the Company. Each of these factors is described below.
    
 
     Distribution channels.  Prior to 1992, the Company utilized a direct  sales
force  as its primary method of distribution.  The Company has since shifted its
distribution mix by  using resellers and  Company-owned stores for  distribution
and  marketing. This  broader distribution strategy  has allowed  the Company to
capture an increasing share  of the consumer segment  of the market and  improve
penetration  in its existing markets. The  Company opened its first retail store
in July 1993 and has
 
                                       21
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
increased the number  of retail  stores to  67 at March  31, 1996.  Many of  the
Company-owned  stores  are  located in  retail  areas, enabling  the  Company to
establish direct relationships with consumers.
 
   
     Wide area  900 MHz  Systems.   Since 1992,  the Company  has developed  its
operations  primarily on  wide area  900 MHz  transmission systems  which it has
deployed in its  existing and expansion  markets. As a  result of upgrading  its
signal protocol to a FLEX'tm'-based system, the Company is able to offer service
to  customers at higher speed and with improved reliability. The Company is also
developing the System Licenses to provide additional geographic coverage options
for the customer.
    
 
     Geographic Expansion Program.   Since 1994, the  Company has undertaken  an
expansion  program to  increase the coverage  of its existing  operations and to
enter new geographic regions. In 1994, the Company began marketing its  services
in  the Philadelphia  and Los  Angeles/Orange County  markets, and  in 1995, the
Company began marketing its  services in the  Boston and Baltimore/  Washington,
D.C.  markets. Within the next  twelve months the Company  expects to operate in
four regions, including  the Northeast,  anchored by  New York  City, the  West,
anchored  by Los Angeles,  the Midwest, anchored by  Chicago, and the Southeast,
anchored  by  Miami/Ft.  Lauderdale.  See  'Business  --  Geographic   Expansion
Strategy.'
 
     The  Company's expansion plans require  significant capital investment. New
markets generally incur operating losses from  start-up and other costs until  a
sufficient  customer base  has been  established. Based  on its  experience, the
Company typically enters new markets by selling its wireless messaging  services
through  resellers  in  order  to  rapidly  penetrate  the  market  and  build a
sufficient base  of subscribers.  Historically, once  the Company  has gained  a
sufficient  base of subscribers in a market, it generally opens retail stores in
order to further enhance its market  penetration and expand its direct sales  to
consumers in the market.
 
   
     The  Company's  net  revenues  are derived  primarily  from  fixed periodic
recurring fees, not dependent  upon usage, charged  to subscribers for  wireless
messaging  services. Such fees  are paid by subscribers  generally on a monthly,
quarterly, semi-annual  or annual  basis. As  long as  a subscriber  remains  in
service,  future operating results  benefit from the  recurring periodic revenue
stream, without the  incurrence of  additional selling  expenses. The  Company's
strategic  shift  in  its  mix of  distribution  channels  towards  the reseller
channel, in particular,  has contributed  to a decrease  in ARPU  over the  last
three  years. This decrease has resulted  from the lower wholesale service price
charged to resellers compared to higher retail prices charged to end users. This
decrease has been partially offset by lower operating costs resulting  generally
from  the structure of  the relationship between the  Company and its resellers.
The Company sells wireless messaging  services at wholesale rates to  resellers.
Resellers then sell those wireless messaging services to their own customers and
therefore  bear all of the costs of marketing, administration and disconnections
related to such customers. Thus, while the Company bears the cost of maintaining
its wireless messaging network, in the context of sales to resellers the Company
does not incur certain costs  that it would otherwise  incur if it were  selling
wireless messaging services directly to subscribers.
    
 
     As  a result of the Company's focus on the reseller and Company-owned store
distribution channels, the Company sells, rather than leases, substantially  all
of the end-user equipment used by its subscribers. The Company therefore recoups
a substantial portion of equipment costs upon sale to resellers and subscribers.
This  results in lower capital  expenditures, depreciation and amortization than
if the Company leased such equipment to its subscribers.
 
     The definitions below  relate to management's  discussion of the  Company's
results of operations that follows.
 
             Services,   rent  and  maintenance  revenues:    include  primarily
             monthly, quarterly,  semi-annually  and annually  billed  recurring
             revenue,  not generally dependent on  usage, charged to subscribers
             for wireless messaging and related services such as voice mail  and
             equipment repair and replacement.
 
             Net  revenues:  include services, rent and maintenance revenues and
             sales of  subscriber equipment  and accessories  less the  cost  of
             equipment sold.
 
                                       22
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
             Services,  rent and maintenance expenses:  include costs related to
             the management, operation and maintenance of the Company's  network
             systems, including telecommunications and site rental expenses.
 
             Selling  and marketing expenses:  include salaries, commissions and
             administrative costs  for the  Company's  sales force  and  related
             marketing and advertising expenses.
 
             General  and administrative expenses:  include executive management
             expenses,   accounting,   office-related   expenses,    information
             services, billing, treasury, employee benefits and store rent.
 
   
RESULTS OF OPERATIONS
    
 
     The  following table sets forth the  percentage of net revenues represented
by certain items  in the Company's  Statements of Operations  and certain  other
information for the periods indicated.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                          THREE MONTHS
                                                                         YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,        ENDED MARCH 31,
                                                                      -----------------------------    ------------------
                                                                       1993       1994       1995       1995       1996
                                                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
<S>                                                                   <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
STATEMENT OF OPERATIONS DATA:
  Revenues:
    Services, rent and maintenance.................................      76.7%      83.4%      87.7%      88.3%      90.8%
    Product sales..................................................      58.5       65.5       56.4       55.0       45.3
    Cost of products sold..........................................     (35.2)     (48.9)     (44.1)     (43.3)     (36.1)
                                                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
    Net revenues...................................................     100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0      100.0
                                                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
  Operating expenses:
    Services, rent and maintenance.................................      18.9       21.3       21.4       22.0       21.1
    Selling and marketing..........................................      12.5       15.5       16.4       16.5       16.2
    General and administrative.....................................      23.3       24.0       26.4       27.2       31.3
    Depreciation and amortization..................................      46.6       35.2       33.0       30.5       26.4
    Non-cash compensation expense..................................       0.0        0.0        0.0        0.0        6.8
                                                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
  Operating income (loss)..........................................      (1.3%)      4.0%       2.8%       3.8%      (1.8%)
 
OTHER DATA:
  EBITDA...........................................................   $ 6,563    $ 8,433    $11,796    $ 2,449    $ 3,441
  EBITDA margin....................................................      45.3%      39.2%      35.8%      34.3%      31.4%
  ARPU.............................................................   $  8.00    $  6.18    $  5.20    $  6.11    $  5.08
  EXPU.............................................................      5.71       4.50       3.81       4.55       3.83
  Units in service (at end of period)..............................   164,883    319,687    607,725    368,767    696,623
  Units in service per employee (at end of period).................     1,633      1,648      1,905      1,748      1,819
</TABLE>
    
 
  Three months ended March 31, 1996 compared with three months ended March 31,
1995
 
   
     Net revenues increased by 53.1% to $10.9 million for the three months ended
March  31, 1996  from $7.1 million  for the  three months ended  March 31, 1995.
Services, rent and maintenance revenues increased  by 57.5% to $9.9 million  for
the  three months ended  March 31, 1996  from $6.3 million  for the three months
ended March 31, 1995  due primarily to  an increase in the  number of pagers  in
service,  offset by a decrease  in ARPU. Units in  service increased by 88.9% to
696,623 at March 31, 1996  from 368,767 at March 31,  1995, all of which  growth
was  internally  generated,  and  reflected both  increased  penetration  of the
Company's  existing  markets  as   well  as  expansion   into  the  Boston   and
Baltimore/Washington,  D.C. markets.  ARPU decreased by  16.9% to  $5.08 for the
three months ended March 31,  1996 from $6.11 for  the three months ended  March
31,  1995. This decrease was due primarily to the high reseller component of the
Company's subscriber  mix as  well as  the increasingly  competitive market  for
wireless messaging services.
    
 
     Product sales increased by 26.0% to $5.0 million for the three months ended
March  31, 1996 from $3.9 million for the  three months ended March 31, 1995 due
to an increase in the number of units sold offset by declining unit prices.  The
cost  of products sold rose by 27.6% to  $3.9 million for the three months ended
March 31, 1996 from $3.1 million for  the three months ended March 31, 1995  and
the  net margin on product sales fell to  20.3% from 21.3% over the same period.
The decrease in net margin
 
                                       23
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
reflected primarily the high reseller component of the Company's subscriber  mix
and the increasingly competitive market for pager sales.
 
     Average monthly operating expenses per unit decreased by 15.8% to $3.83 for
the  three months  ended March 31,  1996 from  $4.55 for the  three months ended
March 31, 1995. This decrease was attributable to the Company's continued  focus
on  cost  control and  ability to  achieve  economies of  scale in  its existing
markets, offset by  start-up expenses  in the  Boston and  Baltimore/Washington,
D.C.  markets. In addition, the higher  reseller component of the subscriber mix
contributed to the decline because the  reseller bears a significant portion  of
the operating expenses associated with each unit.
 
     Services,  rent and maintenance expenses increased by 46.5% to $2.3 million
for the three months ended March 31, 1996 from $1.6 million for the three months
ended March 31, 1995 and decreased slightly  as a percentage of net revenues  to
21.1%  for the three months ended March 31, 1996 from 22.0% for the three months
ended March 31, 1995. This increase was due primarily to higher network and site
rental expenses associated with the Company's  expansion into new markets. On  a
per  unit basis,  monthly services, rent  and maintenance  expenses decreased by
22.9% to $1.18  for the three  months ended March  31, 1996 from  $1.53 for  the
three  months ended March 31, 1995.  This decrease was attributable to increased
economies of scale realized from the expansion of the Company's operations.
 
   
     Selling and marketing expenses increased by  50.3% to $1.8 million for  the
three  months ended March 31, 1996 from  $1.2 million for the three months ended
March 31, 1995 and decreased  as a percentage of net  revenues to 16.2% for  the
three  months ended March 31,  1996 from 16.5% for  the three months ended March
31, 1995. The increase  in selling and marketing  expenses was due primarily  to
start-up  costs and staffing expenses related to  the opening of new stores. The
number of Company-owned stores grew to 67 at March 31, 1996 from 33 at March 31,
1995. Monthly selling  and marketing  expenses per  unit decreased  by 20.2%  to
$0.91  for the three months ended March 31, 1996 from $1.14 for the three months
ended March  31,  1995.  This  decrease was  attributable  to  the  decrease  in
marketing costs associated with the increase in subscribers through the reseller
channel  for which the reseller absorbs the  majority of the marketing and sales
costs.
    
 
     General and administrative expenses increased by 76.1% to $3.4 million  for
the  three months ended  March 31, 1996  from $1.9 million  for the three months
ended March 31, 1995 and increased as a percentage of net revenues to 31.3%  for
the  three months  ended March 31,  1996 from  27.2% for the  three months ended
March 31, 1995.  This increase  was attributable primarily  to costs  associated
with  the  growth in  the Company's  coverage  area and  the expansion  into new
markets, including increased staffing and other infrastructure expenses. Monthly
general and administrative expenses per unit decreased by 6.9% to $1.75 for  the
three  months ended March 31,  1996 from $1.88 for  the three months ended March
31, 1995. This decrease was due primarily to the increase in subscribers.
 
     EBITDA increased by 40.5% to $3.4 million for the three months ended  March
31,  1996 from $2.4  million for the three  months ended March  31, 1995 and the
EBITDA margin fell to 31.4% for the three months ended March 31, 1996 from 34.3%
for the three months  ended March 31,  1995. The decrease  in the EBITDA  margin
reflects the factors discussed above.
 
     Depreciation  and amortization expenses increased  by 32.7% to $2.9 million
for the three months ended March 31, 1996 from $2.2 million for the three months
ended March 31, 1995 and decreased as a percentage of net revenues to 26.4%  for
the  three months  ended March 31,  1996 from  30.5% for the  three months ended
March 31,  1995. The  increase  in depreciation  and amortization  expenses  was
attributable to the Company's continued expansion program.
 
     Interest expense increased to $0.6 million for the three months ended March
31,  1996  from $0.5  million for  the three  months ended  March 31,  1995. The
increase was due to additional borrowings  raised during the three months  ended
March  31,  1996, the  proceeds  of which  were  used primarily  to  finance the
Company's expansion program. Average  borrowings outstanding were $39.8  million
and  $22.7  million during  the  three months  ended  March 31,  1996  and 1995,
respectively, and the weighted  average interest cost was  6.42% and 9.42%  over
the same period.
 
     During  1992  and 1993,  the Company  granted  to certain  employees equity
interests which  were to  be realized  upon the  occurrence of  certain  events.
Effective  January  1,  1996,  these equity  interests  were  cancelled  and the
employees were issued  168,900 units under  the Phantom Stock  Plan at a  strike
price
 
                                       24
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
of  $0, vest over a five-year period from  the original date of grant in 1992 or
1993, as applicable, and had  a grant date value of  $6 per unit. The  employees
received  credit  for vesting  through the  date of  cancellation of  the equity
interests. In addition, on January 1, 1996, 150,350 units were issued under  the
Phantom  Stock Plan, at a strike price of  $6 per unit and vest over a five-year
period. As  determined  by an  independent  investment bank  valuation  and  the
Company's  Compensation Committee the per unit value  on January 1, 1996 was $6.
As a result, the financial statements for the three months ended March 31,  1996
reflect  non-cash compensation  expense of  $747,000 (which  amount includes the
cumulative effect of the vesting from 1992 forward) with a corresponding  credit
to  additional paid-in-capital.  The remaining non-cash  compensation expense of
$266,000 will  be  recognized  by  the  Company over  the  next  two  years.  In
connection  with the  Offerings, the  above units  will be  converted to options
under the TSR Paging Inc. Employee Option Plan (the 'Plan'). Assuming an initial
public offering price of $17.00 per share, the units will convert to a total  of
316,407 options at an exercise price of $8.50 per share.
    
 
     The net loss decreased to $0.8 million for the three months ended March 31,
1996  from $0.3 million for the three months ended March 31, 1995 as a result of
the factors discussed above.
   
    
 
  Year ended December 31, 1995 compared with year ended December 31, 1994
 
     Net revenues increased by 53.2% to $33.0 million in 1995 from $21.5 million
in 1994. Services,  rent and maintenance  revenues increased by  61.0% to  $28.9
million  in 1995 from $18.0 million in 1994  due primarily to an increase in the
number of pagers  in service, offset  by a  decrease in ARPU.  Units in  service
increased  by 90.1% to 607,725 at December 31, 1995 from 319,687 at December 31,
1994, all of which growth was internally generated, and reflected both increased
penetration of the  Company's existing  markets as  well as  expansion into  the
Boston  and Baltimore/Washington, D.C. markets. ARPU decreased by 15.9% to $5.20
in 1995 from $6.18 in 1994. This decrease was due primarily to the high reseller
component  of  the  Company's  subscriber  mix  as  well  as  the   increasingly
competitive market for wireless messaging services.
 
     Product  sales  increased by  32.1%  to $18.6  million  in 1995  from $14.1
million in  1994 due  to an  increase  in the  number of  units sold  offset  by
declining  unit prices. The cost of products sold rose by 38.3% to $14.5 million
in 1995 from $10.5 million in 1994 and  the net margin on product sales fell  to
21.8%  in 1995  from 25.3%  over the  same period.  This decrease  in net margin
reflected primarily the high reseller component of the Company's subscriber  mix
and the increasingly competitive market for pager sales.
 
     Average  monthly operating expenses per unit decreased by 15.3% to $3.81 in
1995 from  $4.50  in 1994.  This  decrease  was attributable  to  the  Company's
continued  focus on cost  control and ability  to achieve economies  of scale by
spreading the fixed costs of its  operations over a larger base of  subscribers.
In  addition, the higher reseller component of the subscriber mix contributed to
the decline because the  reseller bears a significant  portion of the  operating
expenses associated with each unit.
 
   
     Services,  rent and maintenance expenses increased by 53.7% to $7.1 million
in 1995 from $4.6 million in 1994 and increased slightly as a percentage of  net
revenues to 21.4% in 1995 from 21.3% in 1994. This increase was due primarily to
start-up  costs  associated  with  the Boston,  Baltimore  and  Washington, D.C.
systems, increases in telecommunications expenses related to subscriber  growth,
including  the pre-purchasing  of telephone  codes and  leased lines,  and other
expenses related to the build-out of the Company's network, including  increased
site  rental costs  and the building  of a Company-owned  and operated satellite
up-link facility. On a  per unit basis, monthly  services, rent and  maintenance
expenses  decreased by 19.6% to $1.27 in  1995 from $1.58 in 1994. This decrease
was attributable to increased economies of scale realized from the expansion  of
the Company's operations.
    
 
     Selling  and marketing expenses increased by  62.0% to $5.4 million in 1995
from $3.3 million in 1994 and increased as a percentage of net revenues to 16.4%
in 1995  from  15.5%  in  1994. This  increase  was  attributable  primarily  to
increased   advertising  and  other  expenses  associated  with  the  growth  of
Company-owned stores and the expansion  into new geographic markets. The  number
of  Company-owned stores grew to 58 by December 31, 1995 from 29 at December 31,
1994. Monthly selling  and marketing expenses  per unit decreased  by 15.7 %  to
$0.97 in 1995 from $1.15 in 1994. This decrease was
 
                                       25
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
attributable  to the decrease in marketing costs associated with the increase in
subscribers through  the reseller  channel for  which the  reseller absorbs  the
majority of the marketing and sales costs.
 
     General  and administrative expenses increased by  68.8% to $8.7 million in
1995 from $5.2 million in 1994 and increased as a percentage of net revenues  to
26.4%  in 1995 from 24.0%  in 1994. This increase  was attributable primarily to
costs associated with  the growth  in the Company's  subscriber base,  including
increased  billing  and  collection  costs  and  increased  staffing  and  other
infrastructure expenses  incurred  in  anticipation of  future  growth.  Monthly
general and administrative expenses per unit decreased by 11.8% to $1.57 in 1995
from  $1.78  in  1994.  This  decrease was  due  primarily  to  the  increase in
subscribers.
 
     EBITDA increased by  39.9% to $11.8  million in 1995  from $8.4 million  in
1994  and  the EBITDA  margin fell  to 35.8%  in  1995 from  39.2% in  1994. The
decrease in the EBITDA margin reflects the factors discussed above.
 
     Depreciation and amortization expenses increased by 43.4% to $10.9  million
in  1995 from $7.6 million in 1994 and decreased as a percentage of net revenues
to 33.0%  in  1995  from  35.2%  in  1994.  The  increase  in  depreciation  and
amortization  expenses  was generally  attributable  to the  Company's continued
expansion program and increased investment in technical facilities.
 
     Interest expense increased  to $2.5 million  in 1995 from  $1.0 million  in
1994.  The increase  was due  to additional  borrowings raised  during 1995, the
proceeds of  which  were  used  primarily to  finance  the  Company's  expansion
program,  and an increase in the weighted  average interest cost paid during the
year. Average borrowings outstanding were $26.1 million and $14.5 million during
1995 and 1994, respectively,  and the weighted average  interest cost was  9.15%
and 7.14% over the same period.
 
     The  Company incurred $0.6  million from unusual items  and $0.6 million of
extraordinary items and  discontinued operations during  1995. The unusual  item
expense incurred during 1995 of $0.6 million related to certain merger activity.
The   discontinued   operation  expense   of   $0.3  million   related   to  the
discontinuation of the Company's answering service operations. The extraordinary
item expense of  $0.3 million  related to  the write-off  of deferred  financing
costs  following the Company's refinancing of its credit agreement. During 1994,
the unusual item expense  of $0.6 million related  to costs associated with  the
commencement  of  an  initial  public offering  which  was  terminated  prior to
completion.
 
     The net loss increased to $2.9 million in 1995 from $0.8 million in 1994 as
a result of the factors discussed above.
   
    
 
  Year ended December 31, 1994 compared with year ended December 31, 1993
 
     Net revenues increased by 48.4% to $21.5 million in 1994 from $14.5 million
in 1993. Services,  rent and maintenance  revenues increased by  61.5% to  $18.0
million  in 1994 from $11.1 million in 1993  due primarily to an increase in the
number of units  in service,  offset by  a decrease  in ARPU.  Units in  service
increased  by 93.9% to 319,687 at December 31, 1994 from 164,883 at December 31,
1993 primarily due to  increased penetration of  existing markets and  expansion
into  the Philadelphia and Los Angeles/Orange County markets. In particular, the
Company benefited from marketing  its wide area paging  systems in its New  York
and  Arizona markets which  converted to the  900 MHz systems  in March 1993 and
August 1992, respectively. ARPU decreased by  22.7% to $6.18 in 1994 from  $8.00
in 1993. This decrease was due primarily to the increasing reseller component of
the  company's subscriber mix as well as the increasingly competitive market for
wireless messaging services.
 
     Product sales increased by 66.1% to $14.1 million in 1994 from $8.5 million
in 1993. The cost of products sold rose by 106.4% to $10.5 million in 1994  from
$5.1  million in 1993 due to  an increase in the number  of units sold offset by
declining unit prices, and the net margin on product sales fell to 25.3% in 1994
from 39.9%  in  1993. This  decrease  reflected  primarily a  shift  toward  the
reseller  component  of  the  Company's  subscriber  mix  and  the  increasingly
competitive market for product sales.
 
     Average monthly operating expenses per unit decreased by 21.2% to $4.50  in
1994  from  $5.71  in 1993.  This  decrease  was attributable  to  the Company's
continued focus on  cost control and  ability to achieve  economies of scale  by
spreading  the fixed costs of  its operations over a  rapidly increasing base of
subscribers. In addition, the  higher reseller component  of the subscriber  mix
contributed to the
 
                                       26
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
decline  because  the  reseller bears  a  significant portion  of  the operating
expenses associated with each unit.
 
     Services, rent and maintenance expenses increased by 67.1% to $4.6  million
in  1994 from $2.7 million in 1993 and increased as a percentage of net revenues
to 21.3% in 1994 from 18.9% in 1993. This increase was primarily due to start-up
and other  expenses  associated  with  the introduction  of  the  Company's  Los
Angeles/Orange   County  and  Philadelphia  systems,  expenses  related  to  the
Company's continued up-grading  of its  existing network  infrastructure and  an
increase  in telecommunications  expenses related to  subscriber growth. Monthly
services, rent and maintenance expenses on  a per unit basis decreased by  20.2%
to $1.58 in 1994 from $1.98 in 1993. This decrease was attributable to increased
economies of scale realized from the expansion of the Company's operations.
 
     Selling  and marketing expenses increased by  83.7% to $3.3 million in 1994
from $1.8 million in 1993 and increased as a percent of net revenues to 15.5% in
1994 from 12.5% in 1993. This increase was primarily attributable to the  growth
of  the Company operated stores and the expansion into new geographical markets.
The number of Company operated stores increased to 29 at December 31, 1994  from
9  at  December  31,  1993.  Monthly selling  and  marketing  expenses  per unit
decreased by  12.2% to  $1.15 in  1994 from  $1.31 in  1993. This  decrease  was
attributable  to  the  increase  in reseller  subscribers  because  the reseller
absorbs the majority of the marketing and sales costs.
 
     General and administrative expenses increased  by 52.9% to $5.2 million  in
1994  from $3.4 million in 1993 and increased as a percentage of net revenues to
24.0% in 1994  from 23.3% in  1993. This increase  was due to  a combination  of
factors  associated with the growth of  the Company's subscriber base, including
costs associated with  the initiation  of operations of  the Los  Angeles/Orange
County  network, and staffing and other infrastructure expenses. Monthly general
and administrative expenses per  unit decreased by 26.7%  to $1.78 in 1994  from
$2.43 in 1993. This decrease was attributable to the increase in subscribers.
 
     EBITDA increased by 28.5% to $8.4 million in 1994 from $6.6 million in 1993
and  the  EBITDA margin  decreased  to 39.2%  in 1994  from  45.3% in  1993. The
decrease in the EBITDA margin reflects the factors discussed above.
 
     Depreciation and amortization expenses increased  by 12.1% to $7.6  million
in  1994 from $6.8 million in 1993 and decreased as a percentage of net revenues
to 35.2%  in 1994  from 46.6%  in 1993.  This increase  resulted primarily  from
increased  investment  in technical  and  infrastructure facilities  due  to the
Company's expansion of its existing markets and entry into new markets.
 
     Interest expense increased  to $1.0 million  in 1994 from  $0.5 million  in
1993. This increase reflected both an increase in average borrowings outstanding
to  $14.5 million  in 1994  from $7.9  million in  1993 and  an increase  in the
weighted average interest cost to 7.14% from 6.63% over the same period.
 
     The Company  incurred an  unusual  item expense  of  $0.6 million  in  1994
associated  with  the  commencement  of an  initial  public  offering  which was
terminated prior to completion.
 
     The net loss increased by 11.1% to  $0.8 million in 1994 from $0.7  million
in 1993 as a result of the factors discussed above.
   
    
 
LIQUIDITY AND CAPITAL RESOURCES
 
     The  Company's business  strategy requires the  availability of substantial
funds to finance the expansion of its existing operations and customer base, and
the development  and construction  of new  networks and  distribution  channels.
Historically,  these investments have  been funded by  cash flow from operations
and bank  borrowings. Based  upon historical  positive cash  flow and  available
borrowings  under a credit  facility, the Company believes  that it has adequate
resources to sustain its current operations.
 
     Uses of Funds.   The Company's primary use  of funds has historically  been
for  capital expenditures in order to expand its systems in its existing markets
and  to  build  and  develop  systems  in  new  geographical  markets.   Capital
expenditures  were approximately $7.3  million for the  three months ended March
31, 1996 and  $2.8 million for  the three  months ended March  31, 1995.  During
1995,  1994 and  1993, the  Company's capital  expenditures were  $20.6 million,
$13.2 million and $11.0 million,  respectively. The Company experienced  greater
capital expenditures in the three months ended March
 
                                       27
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
31,  1996 and in 1995 due to  a combination of factors, including (i) compliance
with the  construction requirements  imposed by  the FCC  and the  build-out  of
Company-owned  stores in new geographic markets,  and (ii) increased spending in
existing markets  related  to  the  continued  upgrading  of  its  network  onto
FLEX'tm'-based  systems. During  1994 and  1993, capital  expenditures increased
primarily as a  result of  both the construction  of systems  in new  geographic
markets and the upgrading of the Company's existing transmission networks.
    
 
   
     Sources  of Funds.   In  prior years, the  Company has  financed its growth
through internally generated cash flow from  operations and bank debt. Net  cash
flow  from (used in)  operations was $(2.5)  million and ($1.1)  million for the
three months ended March 31, 1996 and 1995, respectively, and $7.9 million, $5.1
million and $9.2 million during 1995, 1994, and 1993, respectively.  Inventories
increased  to $8.7 million at  March 31, 1996 from  $6.4 million at December 31,
1995 and  $3.3 million  at December  31, 1994,  due primarily  to the  Company's
significantly  increased  investment  in pagers  to  support the  growth  of its
subscriber base. Accounts payable  increased to $7.9 million  at March 31,  1996
from  $10.4 million at December 31, 1995  and $5.4 million at December 31, 1994,
again reflecting the significant investment in  pagers to support growth in  the
subscriber  base.  The Company's  overall working  capital surplus  (deficit) at
March 31, 1996 was $1.1 million, compared to ($4.0) million at December 31, 1995
and $(2.1) million at December 31,  1994. The Company's working capital  surplus
at  March  31,  1996  primarily  reflected  an  increase  in  inventory financed
primarily through borrowings under the Credit Facility.
    
 
     Cash flow from  financing activities has  historically reflected  primarily
the  issuance of  long-term debt  under the  Company's bank  facilities. For the
three months ended March 31, 1996, issuance  of bank debt was $9.8 million.  For
1995,  1994 and 1993, issuance of bank  debt was $14.4 million, $9.8 million and
$2.9 million respectively, substantially all  of which, in conjunction with  the
net  cash flow from operations  discussed above, was used  to fund the Company's
capital expenditures.
 
     At March 31, 1996, the Company's liquidity consisted of approximately  $0.1
million  in cash  and cash equivalents.  In addition, the  Company had available
$16.2 million in unused borrowing capacity under the Credit Agreement.
 
     After payment of  the Dividend, the  remainder of the  net proceeds of  the
Offerings  will be used  to fund geographic and  system expansion. The Company's
planned expansion into new geographic regions  will include the purchase of  new
paging equipment, transmitters, satellite networking equipment and other capital
expenditures,  as well as  potential acquisitions, including  the acquisition of
licenses or  radio spectrum  to  expand or  enhance  its services.  The  Company
estimates  that it will  require approximately $60  million in aggregate capital
expenditures during 1996 and 1997 to fund this expansion. The Company intends to
utilize its existing  Credit Agreement  and any  refinancings thereof,  together
with  cash flow from operations and a  portion of the proceeds of the Offerings,
to complete its expansion program. In addition, in connection with the Company's
expansion plans, the Company may  be required to incur additional  indebtedness,
refinance  the Credit Agreement  and/or engage in  other financings, the nature,
amount and  source of  which cannot  now be  determined, but  which may  include
private  or  public offerings  of debt  or  equity securities.  There can  be no
assurance that such financings or refinancings will be available to the  Company
on  acceptable  terms.  The  Company  may also  consider  from  time  to  time a
disposition of certain of its less strategically important assets. However,  the
Company  has no  agreements, commitments or  understandings with  respect to any
such transactions at this time.  Certain transactions involving the  disposition
of  the Company's assets  require the approval  of the lenders  under the Credit
Agreement.
 
     Description of Credit Agreement.  On July 17, 1995 the Company entered into
the Credit Agreement.  The Credit  Agreement increased  the Company's  revolving
line  of credit from $28.0 million to  a $60.0 million revolving credit and term
loan facility. Borrowings under the Credit Agreement have been used to refinance
existing  indebtedness  (under  its  former  credit  agreement),  fund   capital
expenditures and for general corporate purposes. The Credit Agreement is secured
by  substantially all of the assets of the Company. Required quarterly principal
repayments begin September 30, 1997, and continue through September 30, 2002. At
March 31,  1996,  the  Company  had an  outstanding  balance  under  the  Credit
Agreement  of approximately $43.8 million. The Credit Agreement contains various
covenants that, among other  restrictions, (i) require  the Company to  maintain
certain  financial ratios, including an interest  coverage ratio, a fixed charge
coverage ratio  and a  leverage ratio,  (ii) limit  additional indebtedness  and
future mergers and acquisitions without the approval of the lenders, (iii) limit
investments  made by the  Company, (iv) limit  total annual capital expenditures
and (v) restrict the
 
                                       28
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
payment of cash  dividends and  other stockholder distributions  by the  Company
during  the term of the Credit Agreement.  The Credit Agreement also prohibits a
change in control  of the Company,  as defined,  during the term  of the  Credit
Agreement. See 'Description of Certain Indebtedness.'
 
SEASONALITY
 
     Generally,  the  Company's  results  of  operations  are  not significantly
affected by seasonal factors. However, the Company's shift towards  distribution
of  pagers to  the retail market  has caused  it to experience  higher sales and
subscriber growth in the fourth quarter  and correspondingly lower sales in  the
first  quarter. Furthermore, the concentration of  the Company's business in the
northeast has also contributed to slightly lower sales in the first quarter  due
to weather patterns.
 
EFFECT OF INFLATION
 
     Inflation is not a material factor affecting the Company's business. Paging
systems  equipment and transmission  costs have not  increased while pager costs
have declined significantly over time. This  has been reflected in lower  prices
charged  to  the  Company's  subscribers.  General  operating  expenses  such as
salaries, employee benefits and occupancy costs are, however, subject to  normal
inflationary pressures.
 
                                       29


<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                    BUSINESS
 
GENERAL
 
   
     TSR  Paging is a  leading regional provider  of wireless messaging products
and services  and believes  that it  is  one of  the fastest  growing,  low-cost
wireless  messaging  companies in  the  United States.  From  1991 to  1995, the
Company's subscriber base  grew at  an average  compound annual  growth rate  of
92.4%  from 44,304  units in  service to 607,725  units in  service. During this
period, all of the Company's growth has been internally generated. At March  31,
1996,  the Company's subscriber base  had grown to 696,623  units in service and
the Company was ranked as the 12th largest paging company in the United  States,
according to industry sources.
    
 
     The  Company's  operations  are  currently  organized  into  two  operating
regions: (i) the Northeast, including certain metropolitan markets in New  York,
Connecticut,  New  Jersey,  Massachusetts,  eastern  Pennsylvania,  Maryland and
Washington, D.C.; and (ii) the  West, including certain metropolitan markets  in
California,   Arizona  and  Nevada.  The  Company  is  currently  undertaking  a
significant regional  expansion  program, including  the  formation of  two  new
operating  regions, covering  the Midwest and  the Southeast,  and the continued
build-out of  its existing  regions. Set  forth  below is  a table  showing  the
Company's  operating regions and number  of units in service  as of December 31,
1993, 1994 and 1995 and March 31, 1996.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                     NUMBER OF PAGERS IN SERVICE
                                                              ------------------------------------------
                                                                      DECEMBER 31,             MARCH 31,
                                                              -----------------------------    ---------
                                                               1993       1994       1995        1996
                                                              -------    -------    -------    ---------
<S>                                                           <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
Northeast..................................................   128,525    225,785    394,344     460,660
West.......................................................    36,358     93,902    213,381     235,963
                                                              -------    -------    -------    ---------
          Total............................................   164,883    319,687    607,725     696,623
                                                              -------    -------    -------    ---------
                                                              -------    -------    -------    ---------
</TABLE>
 
   
     Traditional 'paging' service involves a signalling or alerting service that
typically prompts a  user to  telephone a  given telephone  number. The  Company
refers to its services as 'wireless messaging' services to distinguish them from
paging   services,  since  wireless  messaging  allows  subscribers  to  receive
communications in the form  of alpha and  numeric text, as well  as acting as  a
conventional alerting service. Developments in messaging technology have enabled
wireless messaging providers such as the Company to transmit more information at
a relatively higher speed, including alphanumeric messages.
    
 
BUSINESS OBJECTIVES
 
   
     The  Company  has historically  generated  positive EBITDA  while achieving
subscriber growth at levels above the industry average. The Company focuses  its
business  efforts on densely populated major metropolitan markets and population
corridors which  exhibit  the  size  and demographic  trends  that  the  Company
believes  should  offer  significant  demand  for  the  Company's  products  and
services. The Company seeks to maximize its returns on capital and leverage  its
operating  cost structure  by achieving  a sufficient  base of  subscribers on a
regional basis.  The Company  primarily  targets the  consumer segment  of  each
market,  which it  believes is the  fastest growing market  segment. The Company
strives to develop  close ties with  its subscribers by  providing high  quality
customer  service and post-sales support in order to lower subscriber disconnect
rates and  position  the Company  as  a  likely distributor  of  other  wireless
communications  services.  The  Company  believes  that  as  wireless  messaging
technology evolves and  new technology  that is complementary  to the  Company's
existing  business lines (such as acknowledgment and voice paging) is proven and
enters the  market, the  Company will  be able  to act  as a  reseller for  such
technology.   The  Company  believes  that  developing  relationships  with  its
subscribers will facilitate this process.  The Company expects to achieve  these
objectives  by continuing  to adhere  to the  key operating  strategies outlined
below.
    
 
  Operating Strategy
 
     The Company  believes  that  the consumer  market  represents  the  fastest
growing  segment of the wireless messaging industry. Industry sources expect the
consumer portion  of the  market to  grow at  a faster  rate than  the  industry
average.  The  Company  believes  this strong  consumer  growth  is attributable
 
                                       30
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
to a combination of factors including declining costs of service and  equipment,
expanding  channels  of  distribution  and  greater  consumer  awareness  of the
benefits offered by wireless communications technology. In addition, the Company
believes the consumer market is less capital intensive and more profitable  than
the  commercial  market, primarily  because  consumer subscribers  typically buy
rather than lease pagers and also  because the consumer subscriber is  generally
less  sensitive to the price of  wireless messaging services than the commercial
subscriber.
 
     The Company applies a focused,  market-specific operating strategy to  each
of the markets in which it operates. The key elements of this strategy include:
 
      Increase Market Penetration through the Reseller Channel.  Through the use
      of  resellers, the Company is able to efficiently market its services to a
      broad population base  and achieve higher  network utilization with  lower
      incremental  capital, sales and administrative costs. The reseller channel
      allows the Company to rapidly gain a presence in newly opened markets  and
      increase  its penetration in existing markets. In addition, the Company is
      able to reach the consumer at a lower incremental capital cost,  primarily
      because  the Company does not incur the selling, marketing, administrative
      and disconnection expenses associated with these subscribers. The  Company
      believes that it differentiates itself in the reseller market by providing
      resellers  with a high level of  support service. For example, the Company
      frequently integrates the reseller's  billing and activation systems  with
      those  of  the Company  through computer  links  and thus  streamlines its
      service to resellers.
 
      Continue  Expansion  of  Company-Owned  Stores.    The  Company  has  been
      operating  its own stores since  July 1993 and currently  has 67 stores in
      operation in eight states. As the appeal of wireless messaging services to
      the consumer market grows,  the Company believes that  it will be able  to
      capture  an  increasingly  significant  share  of  this  market  through a
      targeted  retail  distribution  strategy  that  emphasizes   Company-owned
      stores.  The Company's control  of this distribution  outlet enables it to
      control the  quality  of sales  personnel,  ensure that  subscribers  make
      educated  purchase decisions  and maintain high  quality customer service.
      The Company expects to continue to develop this channel and plans to  open
      stores  in every  market in which  the Company  provides regional wireless
      messaging services.
 
      Low-cost Provider.  The  Company believes that its  has one of the  lowest
      operating  costs  per  pager  in  the  wireless  messaging  industry.  The
      Company's average monthly operating costs per pager were $5.71, $4.50  and
      $3.81  for the years ended 1993,  1994 and 1995, respectively. The Company
      attributes its low operating cost  structure to a combination of  factors,
      including  its (i) high quality customer  service and resultant lower rate
      of disconnections, (ii) focus on the reseller distribution channel whereby
      the reseller absorbs a significant  portion of the operating expenses  per
      pager, (iii) increasing penetration of its existing markets and ability to
      realize  economies of scale, (iv) efficient allocation and productivity of
      personnel, and (v) volume purchase arrangements with suppliers.
 
      Quality Subscriber Service.   The Company  has historically  distinguished
      itself  from other wireless messaging  operators by providing high quality
      customer service  in  each  of  its  markets.  Substantially  all  of  the
      Company's  wireless messaging  systems are  900 MHz  systems which utilize
      Motorola's  state-of-the-art  FLEX'tm'  technology.  FLEX'tm'   technology
      enables  the Company to  more efficiently use  its bandwidth by increasing
      the number of messages transmitted  per minute and thereby increasing  the
      number  of pagers in service  which can be supported  on its systems. As a
      result, the Company's wireless  messaging systems experience little  delay
      in  transmitting  messages  and  are  highly  reliable.  As  part  of  its
      commitment to  'full  service,'  the Company  strives  to  provide  direct
      subscribers  with  high quality  post-sale maintenance,  including 24-hour
      on-call repair  service  and  next-day  replacement  of  lost  or  damaged
      equipment.  The  Company believes  that its  provision of  quality service
      contributes to  an average  disconnect rate  which has  historically  been
      lower  than  that  of the  industry.  According to  industry  sources, the
      average monthly disconnect rate for the industry during 1993 and 1994, the
      last years for which data is available, was 2.9% and 2.8%. In  comparison,
      the  Company's average monthly disconnect rate for 1993, 1994 and 1995 was
      1.9%, 1.3% and 1.1%, respectively.
 
                                       31
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
      Focus on COAM vs.  Leased Pagers.  The  Company emphasizes customer  owned
      and  maintained ('COAM')  pagers instead  of leased  pagers. Since  a COAM
      customer is responsible for the purchase and maintenance of the unit, this
      strategy results  in  significantly  reduced  capital  investment  by  the
      Company  on a per unit basis,  reduced collection expenses and a reduction
      in lost units. In addition, the  Company believes a COAM customer is  less
      likely  to switch or terminate service than a subscriber who leases a unit
      due to  the  higher  up  front  cost incurred  in  the  purchase  and  the
      inconvenience involved in switching to a new frequency.
 
      Develop   Strategic  Alliances.    The  Company  has  established  several
      strategic relationships with other  providers of communications  services.
      These  providers, which enjoy strong brand awareness, resell the Company's
      wireless messaging services under their own brand name and, in some cases,
      package the  product  with  other  communications  services.  The  Company
      currently  has  resale relationships  with AT&T  Wireless, Inc.  and Jones
      Intercable,  Inc.   The  Company   also  has   an  agreement   with   Bell
      Atlantic/NYNEX Mobile, Inc. for the sale of cellular telephone service and
      related  equipment  through  the  majority of  the  Company's  stores. The
      Company actively seeks out strategic  partners when it believes  synergies
      exist.
 
  Geographic Expansion Strategy
 
   
     The  Company's geographic expansion strategy incorporates two key elements:
(i) the continued build-out of its  existing regional networks in the  Northeast
(anchored by New York City) and the West (anchored by Los Angeles), and (ii) the
development  of  networks in  new markets,  including the  formation of  two new
operating regions, covering the Midwest (anchored by Chicago) and the  Southeast
(anchored  by Miami/Ft.  Lauderdale). Currently the  Company has  the ability to
provide regional  wireless  messaging coverage  to  its subscribers.  Thus,  for
example,  a subscriber  in the  Northeast region  can receive  messages anywhere
between the New York/New Jersey area and Washington, D.C. or Boston. The Company
does  not  currently  offer  inter-regional   or  nationwide  coverage  to   its
subscribers.  Thus, for example, a subscriber  in the Northeast region would not
be able to receive messages in the Midwest or West region.
    
 
     During 1996, the Company commenced construction in its new Midwest  region,
with service to be anchored by Chicago and extending to Milwaukee, and commenced
construction  in its Southeast region. In addition, the Company expanded service
within its existing West region to the San Francisco and San Jose markets.
 
     The Company's strategy when  entering a new market  is to use the  reseller
channel in order to rapidly penetrate the market and establish a sufficient base
of subscribers. As the Company becomes more established in a region, in addition
to  the reseller channel, the Company generally  opens retail stores in order to
further enhance its market penetration and expand its direct sales to  consumers
in the market.
 
   
     Substantially  all  of the  Company's existing  and new  wireless messaging
operations are being developed using wide area 900 MHz transmission systems. The
wide area 900 MHz transmission system and the use of FLEX'tm' technology provide
the Company with ample growth capacity as it expands and enters new markets.
    
 
                                       32
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
     The following chart sets forth information regarding each of the  Company's
markets  in operation or which  are expected to be  completed within the next 12
months:
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
   REGION                         MARKET                            SERVICE DATE(1)
- -------------  ---------------------------------------------     ----------------------
<S>            <C>                                               <C>
NORTHEAST:     New York/
                 New Jersey.................................     1/87
               Harrisburg...................................     2/75
               Philadelphia.................................     6/94
               Hartford.....................................     11/94
               Boston.......................................     9/95
               Providence...................................     Under construction(2)
               Baltimore....................................     10/95
               Washington, D.C. ............................     10/95
               Pittsburgh...................................     Under construction
 
MIDWEST:       Chicago......................................     6/96
               Milwaukee....................................     6/96
 
SOUTHEAST:     Miami/
                 Ft. Lauderdale.............................     Under construction
               Tampa/
                 St. Petersburg.............................     Under construction
 
WEST:          Los Angeles..................................     6/94
               San Diego....................................     11/85
               Phoenix......................................     9/87
               Tucson.......................................     5/87
               Las Vegas....................................     Under construction(2)
               San Francisco................................     4/96
               San Jose.....................................     4/96
               Sacramento...................................     Under construction(2)
               Denver.......................................     Under construction
</TABLE>
    
 
- ------------
 
(1) Service Date  refers to  the approximate  date on  which the  Company  began
    marketing its services in such market.
 
(2) The  Company  currently  provides  coverage, but  does  not  yet  market its
    wireless messaging services, in this region.
 
PCS STRATEGY
 
     During the second  half of 1994,  the FCC auctioned  a portion of  spectrum
which  was allocated  for advanced  wireless messaging  services, also  known as
narrowband PCS. This spectrum will  allow wireless messaging operators to  offer
an  array of  enhanced products and  services which  previously were unavailable
given the limited  spectrum allocated  to existing  one-way messaging  services.
These  products include pagers that can transmit  both voice and data and pagers
which will allow subscribers to acknowledge the receipt of messages.
 
   
     The  Company  pursues  strategic  relationships  with  PCS  developers  and
operators  in  order to  be able  to offer  subscribers narrowband  PCS services
without the licensing  or capital  cost associated  with the  construction of  a
narrowband PCS network. For example, the Company recently signed a memorandum of
understanding with PCS Development Corporation ('PCSD') (a nationwide narrowband
PCS  license  holder) to  act as  a distributor  of PCSD's  services, such  as a
wireless voice  messaging product.  In addition,  the Company  will continue  to
evaluate  whether to participate in future  government auctions for FCC licenses
as the technology associated with these services becomes more widely  accessible
and more cost effective to deploy.
    
 
                                       33
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
WIRELESS MESSAGING OPERATIONS
 
  Subscribers and Services
 
     The  Company currently provides  two principal types  of wireless messaging
services in its markets: digital display and alphanumeric display. Both  digital
display  and alphanumeric pagers  can be used in  conjunction with the Company's
voicemail services.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
          TYPE OF SERVICE                                             DESCRIPTION
- ------------------------------------  ---------------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                   <C>
Numeric (Digital Display) Wireless
  Messaging Service.................  Numeric wireless messaging service permits a caller, utilizing a  touchtone
                                      telephone,  to transmit to  a subscriber a numeric  message consisting of a
                                      telephone number, an  account number or  coded information. Numeric  pagers
                                      have  memory capability to store several such numeric messages which can be
                                      recalled by a subscriber when desired.
Alphanumeric Wireless Messaging
  Service...........................  Alphanumeric wireless messaging service  allows subscribers to receive  and
                                      store  messages consisting of both letters and numbers. Alphanumeric pagers
                                      have sufficient memory to store thousands of characters. This service  also
                                      has  the ability  to tie into  computer-based networks  to provide advanced
                                      messaging services such as  periodic news and  sports updates. Callers  may
                                      input  messages either by using the Company's or another wireless messaging
                                      company's operator  dispatch  center, a  personal  computer or  a  portable
                                      alphanumeric input device, such as AlphaMate'tm' manufactured by Motorola.
Voice Mail Service..................  Voice  mail  service  enables a  caller  to  leave a  recorded  message and
                                      automatically alerts a subscriber, through a pager, that a message has been
                                      recorded. A subscriber  may retrieve  messages 24  hours a  day by  calling
                                      their  voice mailbox from any touch-tone telephone. The Company's voicemail
                                      system provides complete message  privacy, allows for personalized  message
                                      greetings  and enables voice messages to be sent to a large group of people
                                      simultaneously.
</TABLE>
 
     The Company provides wireless messaging services to subscribers for a fixed
periodic fee, generally on  a monthly, quarterly,  semi-annual or annual  basis.
Fees  for  wireless  messaging services  generally  increase with  the  level of
service provided and the sophistication of the pager, but vary according to  the
competitive conditions in different geographic markets, the size of the contract
involved  and the type of distribution channel  through which the pager is sold.
The Company markets a variety of  coverage options to subscribers, from  service
in  a particular market to additional  regional coverage for an incremental fee.
For example, customers in the New York region (covering New York, New Jersey and
Connecticut) can  purchase  coverage in  the  Boston market  for  an  additional
periodic charge.
 
     In addition to its wireless messaging and voicemail operations, the Company
also  markets complementary products and  services, including cellular telephone
equipment and service.  As PCS  and other advanced  wireless messaging  services
become  available,  the Company  expects to  market  such products  and services
through its  Company-owned stores.  These  complementary products  and  services
generate  incremental revenues to  the Company, improve  the productivity of its
sales and service staff and further enhance the Company's position as a provider
of wireless communications services and equipment.
 
                                       34
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
     The following table sets  forth the number of  subscriber units of  various
types in service at December 31, 1993, 1994 and 1995 and March 31, 1996.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                    UNITS IN SERVICE BY TYPE
                                      ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               DECEMBER 31,                                 MARCH 31,
                                      --------------------------------------------------------------    ------------------
                                             1993                  1994                  1995                  1996
                                      ------------------    ------------------    ------------------    ------------------
                                      NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
<S>                                   <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
Numeric display units..............   153,868       93%     306,977       96%     586,267       96%     671,808       96%
Alphanumeric display units.........    2,999         2       6,676         2      17,898         3      21,577         3
Other(1)...........................    8,016         5       6,034         2       3,560         1       3,238         1
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
        Total......................   164,883      100%     319,687      100%     607,725      100%     696,623      100%
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
(1) Includes tone-only and tone plus voice units.
 
     Subscribers either lease the pager from the Company for an additional fixed
periodic  fee or  own the pager,  having purchased  it from the  Company or from
another vendor. At March 31, 1996,  approximately 96% of the Company's units  in
service  were owned by  subscribers. The following table  sets forth at December
31, 1993,  1994  and  1995  and  March 31,  1996,  the  respective  numbers  and
percentages  of  pagers that  were  (i) serviced  by  the Company  and  owned by
resellers or direct subscribers and (ii)  serviced and owned by the Company  and
leased to subscribers.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                 OWNERSHIP OF UNITS IN SERVICE
                                      ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               DECEMBER 31,                                 MARCH 31,
                                      --------------------------------------------------------------    ------------------
                                             1993                  1994                  1995                  1996
                                      ------------------    ------------------    ------------------    ------------------
                                      NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
<S>                                   <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
Subscriber owned (COAM)............   136,168       83%     291,574       91%     577,824       95%     667,469       96%
Company owned and leased to
  subscribers......................   28,715        17      28,113         9      29,901         5      29,154         4
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
        Total......................   164,883      100%     319,687      100%     607,725      100%     696,623      100%
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
</TABLE>
 
  Sales and Marketing
 
     Subscribers who use wireless messaging services have traditionally included
small  business operators and employees, professionals, medical personnel, sales
and service providers,  construction and tradespeople,  and real estate  brokers
and developers. However, the appeal of wireless messaging to the consumer market
is  growing  substantially  and the  service  is increasingly  being  adopted by
individuals for  private, nonbusiness  uses such  as communicating  with  family
members and friends.
 
     The  Company historically relied on direct  sales to market its services to
wireless messaging customers. Over  the last three  years, however, the  Company
has  implemented a broader  distribution strategy designed  to capitalize on the
growing mass  market  appeal of  wireless  messaging products.  This  sales  and
marketing  strategy includes three different  distribution channels to penetrate
the consumer  and  small business  market:  (i) resellers  (including  strategic
partners)  which purchase wireless  messaging services and  resell them to their
own subscribers generally on  a private label  basis; (ii) Company-owned  stores
which sell pagers and cellular telephones (including their related services) and
wireless communications devices and accessories directly to consumers; and (iii)
a  direct sales  force that concentrates  selectively on  small and medium-sized
business accounts. At March 31, 1996, the Company employed a sales force of  173
sales  representatives,  including the  Company's direct  sales staff  and sales
representatives in  Company-owned stores.  Sales  and marketing  strategies  and
policies  in  each of  the  Company's regions  are  directed by  a  Company Vice
President dedicated  to each  region. The  Company's distribution  channels  are
described below.
 
      Resellers.  Resellers buy wireless messaging services from the Company for
      resale to their own business clients and individual customers. Through the
      use  of resellers, the Company is  able to efficiently market its services
      to a broad  population base  and achieve higher  network utilization  with
      lower  incremental  capital,  sales  and  administrative  costs. Resellers
      provide an effective sales
 
                                       35
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
      channel through which to enter new markets and to access specific consumer
      niches  in  existing  markets  for  which  the  Company  could  not   cost
      effectively  justify  a  direct  sales effort.  The  Company  provides its
      resellers with a high  level of support by,  among other things,  allowing
      administrative  and operational  connections between the  reseller and the
      Company. For  example, the  Company frequently  integrates the  reseller's
      billing  and activation  systems with  those of  the Company.  The Company
      issues a  consolidated  monthly bill  to  each  reseller, and  it  is  the
      reseller who is responsible for the marketing, billing and collection, and
      equipment  maintenance for each of its  customers. Thus, while the Company
      bears the  cost of  maintaining  its wireless  messaging network,  in  the
      context  of sales  to resellers the  Company does not  incur certain costs
      that it  would  otherwise incur  if  it were  selling  wireless  messaging
      services   directly  to  subscribers.  The   Company  believes  that  this
      integration of systems results in  increased reseller retention. At  March
      31, 1996, the Company distributed its services through approximately 3,000
      resellers.  The Company has also  established strategic relationships with
      other  telecommunications  service  providers  who  market  the  Company's
      services under their own brand name. The Company has agreements to provide
      wireless   messaging  services  through  AT&T  Wireless,  Inc.  and  Jones
      Intercable, Inc.
    
 
      Company-Owned Stores.  In  July 1993, the Company  initiated a program  to
      develop  a retail distribution channel  through Company owned and operated
      retail stores. At  March 31, 1996,  the Company operated  67 such  stores,
      primarily  under  the 'Beeper  Warehouse' brand  name, that  sell wireless
      messaging services  and equipment.  The stores  are typically  located  in
      strip  shopping  centers  or  other  high-traffic  retail  locations,  and
      generally range from approximately 600 to  1,200 square feet in size.  The
      Company   believes  that  retail  locations  increase  'walk-in'  traffic,
      particularly from non-business, consumer  users. In addition, the  Company
      is  able to provide  direct, high-quality customer  service to subscribers
      and control the quality of the sales process, thereby allowing the Company
      to more effectively manage  the level of disconnects  in this channel.  In
      addition,  the Company is able to  increase store revenues and enhance its
      customer relationships  through  the  sale  of  additional  equipment  and
      services,  including cellular phones and  accessories. The stores also act
      as service centers for direct and reseller customers, providing repair and
      maintenance services. The  Company generally leases  its stores for  terms
      ranging  from one to five  years. The Company intends  to continue to open
      stores as it expands its regional wireless messaging systems.
 
      Direct Sales.  The  Company's sales force  focuses primarily on  resellers
      and also opportunistically targets small and medium sized businesses where
      management  believes a  specific opportunity exists.  However, the Company
      does not  emphasize  direct sales  as  it believes  that  more  profitable
      subscribers can be targeted through the reseller and retail channels.
 
     The  following table sets  forth information regarding  numbers of units in
service by distribution channel  at December 31, 1993,  1994 and 1995 and  March
31, 1996.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                            UNITS IN SERVICE BY DISTRIBUTION CHANNEL
                                      ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
                                                               DECEMBER 31,                                 MARCH 31,
                                      --------------------------------------------------------------    ------------------
                                             1993                  1994                  1995                  1996
                                      ------------------    ------------------    ------------------    ------------------
                                      NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT    NUMBER     PERCENT
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
<S>                                   <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>        <C>
Resellers..........................   103,649       63%     235,383       74%     485,014       80%     564,489       81%
Company-owned stores...............    1,619         1      16,705         5      50,055         8      59,072         9
Direct sales(1)....................   59,615        36      67,599        21      72,656        12      73,062        10
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
        Total......................   164,883      100%     319,687      100%     607,725      100%     696,623      100%
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
                                      -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------    -------
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
(1) Includes retail sales at service center locations.
 
OPERATIONS
 
     The  Company  manages  its  administrative  functions,  including  billing,
accounting, regulatory, treasury and insurance, from its corporate  headquarters
in Fort Lee, New Jersey. Functions that require more specific customer or market
knowledge, such as marketing, collections and inventory manage-
 
                                       36
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
ment,  are handled on  a decentralized basis  in each of  the Company's markets.
This structure allows the Company to be more responsive to customer demands.  In
addition, the Company believes that its decentralized operating structure allows
it  to provide  greater incentives  to employees by  measuring each  market as a
profit center  and holding  managers accountable  for performance.  Each of  the
markets  in which the Company operates has  its own sales manager and operations
manager who together  make staffing, administrative,  operational and  marketing
decisions  within guidelines established  by senior management.  Each market has
its own  field  sales force,  collections  personnel and  inventory  controller.
Compensation  of  managers  is  based  primarily  on  the  performance  of their
respective markets, taking into account such factors as growth, disconnect rates
and operating profitability. As a result, each manager has a strong incentive to
manage operations cost effectively and  increase the local subscriber base.  The
Company  believes  that  its  decentralized organizational  structure  is  a key
element in its operating strategy and that the financial and accounting  systems
it  has in  place are  adequate to support  substantial market  expansion in the
future.
 
     The  Company's  decentralized  operations  are  monitored  by   centralized
management  information  systems that  provide  senior management  financial and
operating information with detail down to the store and sales person level.  The
Company  believes  that its  management  information systems  are  sufficient to
support the  Company's projected  growth.  In addition,  the Company  is  highly
focused  on cost  control and the  efficient allocation and  productivity of its
personnel and believes  that it has  one of the  lowest costs per  pager in  the
industry.  Average monthly operating costs per pager (operating expenses divided
by average outstanding pagers) were $5.71,  $4.50 and $3.81 for the years  ended
December 31, 1993, 1994 and 1995, respectively.
 
NETWORK AND EQUIPMENT
 
     Substantially  all of the Company's growth  during the last three years has
been on its  wide area  900 MHz  networks which  the Company  believes have  the
capacity  to support  its future growth.  All of the  Company's networks utilize
satellite-based digital  links to  control its  transmitters. The  Company  also
utilizes  its own redundant satellite up-link facilities which operate on Hughes
Galaxy 4 Satellite channels.
 
   
     All of  the Company's  900  MHz transmitters  have 24-hour  monitoring  and
technical support from Company-employed and trained engineers. To ensure maximum
reliability,  coverage  and building  penetration, the  Company designs  its own
wireless messaging networks and, in  many cases, installs its own  transmitters.
Each  of the Company's 900 MHz  transmitters supports multiple frequencies which
enables the Company to transmit on its 900 MHz frequencies. All of the Company's
900 MHz networks are capable of transmitting using FLEX'tm' protocol.
    
 
   
     The Company does not manufacture any of the pagers or related  transmitting
and switching equipment used in its wireless messaging operations. The equipment
used  in  the  Company's  operations is  available  for  purchase  from multiple
sources, and the  Company anticipates that  infrastructure equipment and  pagers
will  continue  to  be  available  to the  Company  in  the  foreseeable future,
consistent with  normal  manufacturing  and delivery  lead  times.  The  Company
continually  evaluates  new  developments in  wireless  messaging  technology in
connection with  the design  and enhancement  of its  systems and  selection  of
products   to  be  offered  to  subscribers.  The  Company  currently  purchases
substantially all  of its  pagers from  Motorola, from  which it  achieves  cost
savings  from  volume purchases.  The  Company purchases  its  transmitters from
Motorola and Glenayre and its switches from Glenayre.
    
 
WIRELESS MESSAGING INDUSTRY OVERVIEW
 
     Industry sources indicate that at December 31, 1995, the wireless messaging
industry served  over  34  million  subscribers  in  the  U.S.,  representing  a
penetration  rate of approximately 13% of  the population. Industry sources also
indicate that in  recent years  the number  of units  in service  in the  United
States has been growing at annual rates in excess of 28% per year since 1989 and
predict  that the  number of units  in service  will continue to  grow at annual
rates of approximately 15% to 20% through the year 2000. Factors that have  been
described  as contributing to this growth include (i) declining costs of service
and subscriber equipment, (ii) increasing awareness of the benefits of  wireless
messaging among
 
                                       37
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
the  general population,  (iii) introduction  of new  or enhanced  equipment and
services, (iv) expanding channels of distribution into the mass consumer market,
(v) significant improvement in productivity, reliability and coverage areas, and
(vi) the relatively high cost of alternative cellular communications services.
 
   
     Historically, the wireless  messaging industry has  been highly  fragmented
and  characterized  by a  large number  of  small, independent  local operators.
However, the  industry  is  currently undergoing  significant  consolidation  as
various participants seek to accomplish growth through acquisitions. The Company
estimates  that the 15  largest companies provide  wireless messaging service to
approximately 63% of the estimated subscribers  in service in the U.S.  However,
several  hundred other licensed wireless messaging companies remain in existence
in the U.S.,  many of which  continue to provide  only local wireless  messaging
services. Consolidation allows larger companies to garner economies of scale and
thus  makes it more difficult for smaller companies to compete successfully. The
Company believes that the wireless  messaging industry will be characterized  by
further  consolidation, and there can be no  assurance that the Company will not
be adversely affected by such consolidation.
    
 
     The Company believes  that future  developments in  the wireless  messaging
industry  will  include  (i)  technological  improvements  that  permit advanced
services and applications  to a  wider market  on a  cost-effective basis,  (ii)
consolidation  of  smaller,  single-market  operators  and  larger, multi-market
wireless messaging companies, and (iii)  increased numbers of pagers in  service
as  a  result of  general  expansion into  consumer  and retail  markets. Future
technological developments  in  the  wireless  messaging  industry  will  likely
include  new wireless  messaging services  such as  'confirmation' or 'response'
paging that  will have  the  ability to  send a  message  back to  the  wireless
messaging  system  that  confirms that  the  paging message  has  been received,
digitized voice paging,  two-way paging and  notebook and sub-notebook  computer
wireless data applications. Narrowband PCS may offer the ability to provide some
of these services.
 
WIRELESS MESSAGING TECHNOLOGY
 
     Wireless  messaging is a method of  one-way wireless messaging that uses an
assigned radio frequency to contact a wireless messaging subscriber anywhere  in
a  service area.  A subscriber  carries a  pager that  receives messages  by the
broadcast of  a one-way  radio signal.  To contact  a subscriber,  a message  is
usually  sent  by  placing  a  telephone  call  to  the  subscriber's designated
telephone number.  The telephone  call is  received by  an electronic  messaging
switch  which then generates a signal that  is sent to radio transmitters in the
service area. Depending upon the topography  of the service area, the  operating
radius  of a  radio transmitter  typically ranges  from three  to 12  miles. The
transmitters send  a  signal  that is  received  by  the pager  carried  by  the
subscriber  and  is  delivered as  a  tone, vibration,  numeric  or alphanumeric
message. A tone-only pager notifies the subscriber that a call has been received
by emitting  a  beeping sound  or  vibration.  In the  case  of  tone-plus-voice
service,  the subscriber's pager emits a beeping sound followed by a brief voice
message. Depending upon the type of pager  in use, the subscriber may receive  a
message that is displayed on the pager or a subscriber may call his or her home,
office  or telemessaging service to receive the message. A digital display pager
permits a  caller to  transmit to  the  subscriber a  numeric message  that  may
consist of a telephone number, an account number or coded information. A digital
display  pager has the memory capability  to store several numeric messages that
can be recalled by  the subscriber when  desired. Alphanumeric display  wireless
messaging service allows subscribers to receive and store messages consisting of
both numbers and text.
 
     The   Company  believes  that  one-way   wireless  messaging  is  the  most
cost-effective and reliable means of conveying a variety of information  rapidly
over  a wide geographic area either directly to a person traveling or to various
fixed locations. One-way wireless messaging is  an inherently lower cost way  to
communicate than two-way communication methods. For example, pagers and air time
required  to transmit an average  message cost less than  equipment and air time
for cellular telephones. Furthermore, pagers  operate for longer periods due  to
superior  battery  life, often  exceeding  one month  on  a single  AAA battery.
Wireless messaging subscribers generally pay a fixed periodic service fee, which
covers a certain number of messages sent to the subscriber. In addition,  pagers
are  unobtrusive, portable and historically have not become obsolete even in the
face of  substantial  technological  advances in  the  communications  industry.
Growth in the number of cellular telephone customers is
 
                                       38
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
increasingly  viewed  as  a  complement  to  wireless  messaging.  Many cellular
telephone customers use pagers  in conjunction with  their telephones to  screen
incoming calls and minimize battery use and cellular usage charges.
 
     The  wireless  messaging  industry has  also  benefited  from technological
advances resulting from research and  development conducted by manufacturers  of
pagers  and transmission equipment. Such advances include microcircuitry, liquid
crystal display technology  and standard  digital encoding  formats, which  have
enhanced  the  capability  and  capacity  of  wireless  messaging  systems while
lowering equipment and air time  costs. Technological improvements have  enabled
and  will continue to enable  the Company to provide  better quality services at
lower prices to its subscribers and have generally contributed to the growth  of
the wireless messaging industry.
 
COMPETITION
 
     The  wireless  messaging industry  is a  highly competitive  industry, with
price being  the primary  means of  differentiation among  providers of  numeric
messaging  services (which  account for  the majority  of the  Company's current
revenues). Companies in the industry also compete on the basis of coverage area,
enhanced  services,  transmission  quality,  system  reliability  and   customer
service. The Company experiences competition from one or more competitors in all
of  the regions in which it operates. Although some of the Company's competitors
are small, privately-owned companies  serving only one  market area, others  are
subsidiaries  or divisions of  larger companies that  provide wireless messaging
services  in  multiple   market  areas.  Many   of  these  competitors   possess
significantly  greater  financial and  other resources  than the  Company. Since
1987, the  Company  has competed  with  Paging Network,  Inc.  ('PageNet'),  the
largest  provider  of  wireless messaging  services  in the  United  States, and
MobileMedia Communications Corporation ('MobileMedia')  in all of the  Company's
major markets.
 
     Paging  also  competes to  a  certain extent  with  a number  of additional
wireless technologies, including  cellular, PCS,  and SMR  services and  various
mobile  satellite services. In 1994, the  FCC began auctioning licenses for PCS.
PCS involves a network  of small, low-powered  transceivers placed throughout  a
neighborhood,  business  complex,  community  or  metropolitan  area  to provide
customers with mobile voice and data communications. There are two types of PCS,
narrowband and  broadband.  Narrowband  PCS  is  expected  to  provide  advanced
wireless  messaging  and other  capabilities,  such as  'acknowledgment paging,'
'talk-back' and voice paging. Broadband PCS is expected to provide new types  of
communications  devices that  will include multi-functional  portable phones and
imaging devices.  Both  narrowband  and  broadband  PCS  are  currently  in  the
developmental  stage,  and  PCS  providers  will  likely  compete  directly  and
indirectly with the Company.
 
     Future  technological  developments  in  the  wireless   telecommunications
industry,  such as  PCS, and enhancements  of current technology  may create new
products and services which could  compete with the wireless messaging  services
currently  offered by the  Company. There can  be no assurance  that the Company
would not  be adversely  affected  by such  technological change.  However,  the
Company  believes that paging is and will continue for the foreseeable future to
be the most cost-effective and  reliable method of wireless messaging.  Compared
to  two-way methods of communications such as cellular telephony, paging service
utilizes smaller,  more easily  transportable equipment,  offers longer  battery
life,   uses  a  signalling  technology  that  penetrates  buildings  and  other
structures more effectively and, most importantly, is less expensive.
 
REGULATION
 
     Currently,  wireless  messaging  companies   provide  paging  services   on
frequencies  allocated  pursuant  to  Parts  22  and  90  of  the  FCC's  Rules.
Traditionally, frequencies allocated pursuant to Part 22 of the FCC's Rules were
authorized on a radio common carrier  ('RCC') basis, with RCC licensees  holding
exclusive  licenses for the  allocated frequency at  specific sites. Frequencies
allocated pursuant to Part 90 of the FCC's Rules ('Private Mobile'  frequencies)
were traditionally allocated on a shared basis subject to frequency coordination
procedures  designed  to avoid  interference with  operation by  other licensees
utilizing the same frequency. The Company  is licensed for both RCC and  Private
Mobile paging systems.
 
                                       39
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
     In  1993,  Congress replaced  the traditional  distinction between  RCC and
Private  Mobile  systems.  In   1995,  the  FCC   adopted  rules  revising   the
classification  of licensees of wireless  services, including paging service, in
accordance with  1993  legislation.  Pursuant to  the  new  classification,  all
wireless  licensees  are classified  as either  Commercial Mobile  Radio Service
('CMRS') licensees or  Private Mobile  Radio Service  ('PMRS') licensees.  Those
carriers,  including the Company and its competitors, who make service available
to the public  on a  for-profit basis  through interconnection  with the  public
switched  telephone network are classified as  CMRS licensees. The Company's RCC
and Private Mobile paging systems  licensed under Parts 22  and 90 of the  FCC's
Rules  are now classified as CMRS systems, although the Company's Private Mobile
systems operating on  929-930 MHz  are subject  to a  transition period  through
August, 1996, during which time these systems will be regulated as PMRS systems.
The  Congressional  and FCC  purpose behind  this new  regulatory scheme  was to
promote regulatory parity  between operators of  similar one-way paging  systems
regardless  of whether those systems  were licensed under Part  22 or Part 90 of
the FCC's  Rules. The  Company believes  that such  parity will  remove  certain
regulatory  advantages that  Private Mobile paging  companies previously enjoyed
and allow similar paging systems to be regulated in a similar fashion.
    
 
   
     The Company's 929-930 MHz paging systems authorized pursuant to Part 90  of
the  FCC's  Rules  (often  referred  to as  'Private  Carrier  Paging'  or 'PCP'
systems), were originally authorized on a shared basis. However, in 1993 the FCC
amended its rules to provide for exclusive operation on these frequencies. Based
on the paging systems licensed to the  Company at the time of adoption of  these
FCC regulations, the Company obtained local and regional exclusivity for many of
its  PCP systems. Exclusive operation  of these PCP systems  is still subject to
certain requirements and limitations including, but not limited to, construction
requirements  and  sharing  with  previously-licensed  'incumbent,'   co-channel
systems.
    
 
     The  Company currently provides paging services to subscribers over its own
transmission facilities on CMRS  systems licensed pursuant to  both Part 22  and
Part  90 of  the FCC's Rules.  The FCC licenses  granted to the  Company are for
varying terms of up to 10 years,  at the end of which time renewal  applications
must  be approved by the FCC. The  Company's current licenses have renewal dates
ranging from  1996 to  2005. Generally,  the FCC  has granted  most  applicants'
renewal applications upon a demonstration of compliance with FCC regulations and
adequate  service to the  public. The FCC has  granted every renewal application
that the Company  has filed,  and all  of the  Company's Part  22 licenses  were
renewed  for a  10-year period  ending April  1, 1999.  Although the  Company is
unaware of any  circumstances which might  prevent the grant  of any pending  or
future renewal applications, no assurance can be given that any of the Company's
licenses  will  be  renewed by  the  FCC. Furthermore,  although  revocation and
involuntary modification of licenses are extraordinary regulatory measures,  the
FCC  has the authority  to restrict the  operation of licensed  facilities or to
revoke or  modify licenses.  None  of the  Company's  licensees have  ever  been
revoked or modified involuntarily by the FCC.
 
     The  Communications Act  requires licensees such  as the  Company to obtain
prior approval from the  FCC for the  assignment or transfer  of control of  any
construction  permit or station  license or any  rights thereunder, including in
the context  of  acquisition  of  other paging  companies  by  the  Company  and
transfers  by the Company  of a controlling  interest in any  of its licenses or
construction permits or any rights  thereunder. In addition, prior FCC  approval
would  be required in connection with any transfer of control of the Company or,
in certain circumstances, the acquisition of fifty percent (50%) or more of  the
equity  of the Company by  a single entity or two  or more entities under common
control. The FCC has approved each acquisition and transfer of control for which
the Company has sought approval in the past.
 
     The Company  also regularly  applies for  FCC authority  to use  additional
frequencies,  modify the technical  parameters of existing  licenses, expand its
service territory and provide  new services under  existing FCC Rules.  Although
there  can be  no assurance  that future  requests for  approval or applications
filed by the Company will  be approved or acted upon  in a timely manner by  the
FCC, or that the FCC will grant such requests or applications, the Company knows
of  no reason to believe any such  requests or applications will not be approved
or granted.
 
     When FCC  approval  is  required,  whether in  connection  with  a  renewal
application,  a transfer of  control or assignment of  license application or an
application for new or modified CMRS facilities for
 
                                       40
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
which prior  FCC authorization  is required,  any interested  party may  file  a
petition to dismiss or deny the application. Pursuant to the Communications Act,
such  application cannot be acted upon until the petition is dismissed or denied
by the FCC or withdrawn or dismissed  by the petitioner. Moreover, any such  FCC
approval   or  authorization  is   subject  to  the   filing  of  petitions  for
reconsideration and other administrative and judicial appeal processes. Although
the Company does not believe that any such petition or appeal will be granted by
the FCC that  would result  in a  material adverse  effect on  the Company,  the
Company  can  give  no assurance  that  such petitions  and/or  appeals, whether
currently outstanding or to be  filed in the future, may  not be granted by  the
FCC resulting in a material adverse effect on the Company.
 
   
     The  Communications Act also limits foreign investment in and the ownership
of entities which are licensed as CMRS carriers by the FCC. Pursuant to  Section
310(b)  of the Communications  Act, as amended by  the Telecommunications Act of
1996, the stock of FCC licensees, such as the Company, may be owned no more than
20%  by  aliens  or   their  representatives,  a   foreign  government  or   its
representatives  or a foreign corporation. For  entities that own or control FCC
licensees, the stock of such entities can be held no more than 25% by aliens  or
their  representatives, a foreign government or its representatives or a foreign
corporation. The FCC has the authority to waive the 25% ownership limitation and
the FCC  has  recently  adopted  a  new  'effective  competitive  opportunities'
analysis that the Company believes may make it easier for the FCC to waive these
ownership limitations, at least for aliens of countries whose telecommunications
markets are open to U.S. participation.
    
 
     In 1993, Congress amended the Communications Act to allow the FCC to assign
radio spectrum licenses through the use of auctions. The FCC has enacted general
regulations  regarding  the conduct  of such  auctions and  the FCC  has already
proceeded to assign certain licenses pursuant to auctions.
 
     Pursuant to this  legislative authority,  the FCC  has adopted  regulations
pursuant  to which the  FCC can utilize  auctions to select  CMRS licensees when
more than  one  entity has  filed  a timely  application  for the  same  license
(referred  to as  'mutually exclusive'  or 'MX'  applications). In  addition, in
February, 1996, the  FCC adopted  a Notice  of Proposed  Rulemaking ('NPRM')  in
which  the FCC proposed to substantially modify  the manner in which CMRS paging
licenses are granted and to utilize auctions in that process.
 
     Specifically, Part 22 and Part 90 paging licenses were previously issued by
the FCC on a site-specific basis with authorization necessary to operate on  any
paging  frequency at  each desired  transmitter location.  In the  NPRM, the FCC
proposed to  utilize a  geographic licensing  process in  place of  the  current
site-specific   licensing  process.  Under  the  FCC's  proposal  in  the  NPRM,
geographic licenses would be established and  sold at auction. Pursuant to  each
such  geographic license,  the licensee  could operate  on a  single CMRS paging
frequency throughout a geographic area defined as a Major Trading Area  ('MTA').
The  United States  is divided into  51 MTA's  and there would  be 51 geographic
licenses issued  for each  CMRS  paging frequency.  A geographic  license  would
confer  upon the licensee the  right to utilize the  authorized frequency at any
location throughout the MTA provided that such operation: (i) does not interfere
with previously authorized  co-channel one-way  paging systems  (referred to  as
'incumbent  systems');  (ii) does  not interfere  with co-channel  operations in
neighboring MTA's;  and (iii)  complies with  other FCC  regulations. Under  the
proposal  specified in the  NPRM, incumbent licensees can  make minor changes to
their existing systems without prior FCC authorization as long as the changes do
not result  in  any increase  in  the  composite interference  contours  of  the
incumbent  licensee's  co-channel system.  Incumbent licensees  cannot, however,
without the consent of the geographic licensee for the subject frequency in  the
subject  MTA, make  any changes  to the incumbent's  existing system  or add any
co-channel transmitters  that  would result  in  an increase  in  the  composite
interference contours of the incumbents' co-channel system.
 
   
     In  the  NPRM, the  FCC  also: (i)  proposed  interim rules  to  govern the
licensing of  paging  frequencies  pending adoption  of  final  rules  governing
geographic licensing; (ii) imposed a Freeze on filing of new paging applications
that  extend the composite interference contours of existing paging systems; and
(iii) proposed  to  exempt  CMRS  paging frequencies  that  are  licensed  on  a
nationwide  exclusive  basis from  geographic  licensing and  the  interim Rules
including the Freeze.
    
 
   
     In a May 1996 First Report and Order ('First R&O'), the FCC adopted Interim
Rules, which included a modification of the Freeze to allow some flexibility  to
file paging applications that extend the
    
 
                                       41
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
composite  interference contours of  existing paging systems.  In a simultaneous
Public Notice ('PN'), the FCC listed those nationwide exclusive paging  channels
that  have been found to be exempt  from geographic licensing, the Interim Rules
and the  modified  Freeze because  they  are nationwide  exclusive  CMRS  paging
frequencies  pursuant to the definition specified in the NPRM. The Company's PCP
frequency 929.2125 MHz was not included in the PN.
    
 
   
     It is the Company's position that the frequency 929.2125 MHz qualifies as a
nationwide exclusive  PCP  frequency that  should  be excluded  from  geographic
licensing and that should be exempt from the modified Freeze now in effect. This
position  is  based on  FCC grant  of  929.2125 MHz  licenses that  comprise the
Company's System  Licences,  FCC grant  of  the Slow  Growth  Authorization  and
Sections  90.495  and  90.496  of  the  FCC's  Rules.  The  Company  has  sought
reconsideration and stay of that portion of the First R&O and the PN that failed
to include 929.2125  MHz as a  nationwide exclusive frequency.  The Company  has
also  filed requests  for waiver of  the Interim  Rules to allow  the Company to
continue filing certain applications  on the frequency 929.2125  MHz as if  that
frequency  had been included in the PN  as a nationwide exclusive frequency. The
FCC has not yet acted on  the Company's reconsideration request, stay or  waiver
requests.  Moreover, the  FCC has still  not adopted final  rules for geographic
licensing of paging frequencies. Based  on informal discussions with FCC  staff,
it  is  the Company's  understanding  that the  issue  of whether  the Company's
frequency 929.2125  MHz  will  be  subjected to  geographic  licensing  will  be
addressed  in  these final  rules. Failure  to have  the Company's  929.2125 MHz
frequency for  which the  Company  holds the  System  Licenses identified  as  a
nationwide   exclusive  CMRS  paging   frequency  (and  as   a  result  of  such
identification excluded from geographic licensing and exempt from the freeze  on
filing  certain types of paging applications) could result in a material adverse
effect on the Company.
    
 
   
     The Company can give no assurances that the FCC will act in accordance with
the Company's pending  reconsideration, stay and  waiver requests regarding  the
Interim Rules adopted in the First R&O and the PN. If the FCC fails to grant the
Company's   reconsideration,   Stay  and/or   waiver  requests,   the  Company's
applications on 929.2125 MHz will remain subject to the modified Freeze and  the
Interim  Rules and the Company's  ability to expand and  modify its 929.2125 MHz
System Licenses will remain limited. The Company can give no assurances that the
FCC will act in accordance with  the Company's position with respect to  whether
the  Company's frequency  929.2125 MHz will  be subject  to geographic licensing
when the FCC adopts  final rules pursuant  to the NPRM. If  the FCC rejects  the
Company's  position  and  subjects  the  Company's  frequency  929.2125  MHz  to
geographic licensing, the Company's planned expansion of the 929.2125 MHz System
Licenses could be hindered and  could require significant additional  investment
to acquire the resulting geographic licenses.
    
 
   
     In  light of the FCC's ability to  utilize auctions to select from among MX
CMRS applications, and as a result of the FCC's proposal to institute geographic
licensing through  auctions for  one-way  paging frequencies,  there can  be  no
assurance that the Company will be able to procure additional frequencies, or to
expand  its  existing paging  networks operating  on  frequencies for  which the
Company is currently licensed into  new geographic areas. Moreover,  acquisition
of  new paging licenses under existing  rules, or new geographic paging licenses
(if the proposals  specified in  the NPRM are  adopted), will  require that  the
Company  make  significant investment  in order  to  obtain these  licenses. The
Company also  believes  that the  use  of auctions  in  the paging  context  may
increase  the number of competitors who have significant financial resources and
may provide an added incentive to build out authorized systems quickly.
    
 
     The FCC has also allocated two MHz of spectrum in the 901-902, 930-931  and
940-941 MHz frequency bands for advanced two-way messaging, characterized by the
FCC  as narrowband PCS. In a separate phase  of the same proceeding, the FCC has
also allocated 120 MHz of  spectrum in the 1.8-2.2  GHz band for broadband  PCS,
which  involves primarily two-way mobile voice and  data services. The FCC is in
the process  of auctioning  licenses for  narrowband and  broadband PCS  systems
across  the country. The Company believes  that the two-way messaging capability
that will be possible on both types  of PCS systems is currently being  provided
by  competitors and is a service that the Company and its competitors may pursue
in the future.
 
     Congress   recently   adopted    and   President    Clinton   signed    the
Telecommunications Act of 1996, which enacted numerous proposals relating to FCC
regulation of communications service providers.
 
                                       42
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
Although   the  Company's  anticipates  that  the  deregulatory  nature  of  the
Telecommunications Act of  1996 will result  in advantages to  the Company,  the
Company  can give no assurances that the  Telecommunications Act of 1996 and the
FCC rules adopted pursuant  thereto will not have  a material adverse effect  on
the Company.
 
     In addition to regulation by the FCC, paging systems are subject to certain
Federal   Aviation  Administration  regulations  with  respect  to  the  height,
location, construction, marking and lighting of towers and antennas.
 
     Further, in  addition to  regulation  by the  FCC, certain  states  imposed
various  regulations on certain paging operations  of the Company. At this time,
the Company is not aware of any proposed state legislation or regulations  which
would have a material adverse impact on the Company's existing operations. There
can  be no assurance, however, that such  legislation or regulations will not be
passed in the future.
 
     From time  to  time, legislation  or  regulations which  could  potentially
affect  the Company, either  beneficially or adversely,  are proposed by federal
and state regulating  entities. There can  be no assurance  this legislation  or
regulation would not have a material adverse impact on the Company's operations.
 
TRADEMARKS AND COPYRIGHTS
 
     On  March 20, 1995, Tri-State Radio Co.,  a partnership that has since been
merged with and into the Company, filed a trademark application with the  United
States  Patent and Trademark  Office with respect to  the name 'Tri-State Radio'
with the United States Patent and Trademark Office. The Company has also filed a
trademark application with  the United  States Patent and  Trademark Office  for
'Beeper  Warehouse,' a name that is used  in connection with the Company's sales
and service centers. The Company  may file additional trademark applications  in
the  future. The  Company's logo,  a radio-wave symbol,  has been  approved as a
service mark by the United States Patent and Trademark Office.
 
PROPERTIES
 
     Substantially all  of the  Company's  office space,  including all  of  its
regional  offices and sales  and service centers, is  leased. The leases provide
for monthly rentals  up to $28,846  and expire, subject  to renewal options,  on
various  dates  from  February, 1996  through  November, 2002.  The  Company was
obligated to  pay approximately  $3.4 million  under such  leases during  fiscal
1995.  Management believes that it will continue to be able to obtain additional
space at  reasonable  costs. The  Company  owns  one office  building  in  York,
Pennsylvania.
 
   
     The  Company also leases sites for its transmitters on commercial broadcast
towers, buildings and other fixed structures. At December 31, 1995, the  Company
leased  sites for approximately  535 transmitters at  an aggregate monthly lease
obligation of  approximately $203,000.  The monthly  rental cost  of these  site
leases  ranges up  to $3,500,  and the  leases expire  at various  dates through
December 2000.
    
 
EMPLOYEES
 
     At March 31, 1996,  the Company employed 376  persons on a full-time  basis
and 42 persons on a part-time basis. Of these, 168 performed managerial, general
and  administrative functions for the Company, 205 were involved in sales, sales
support and  marketing and  45  were involved  in engineering,  maintenance  and
repair.  None of the Company's employees are represented by any labor union, and
management believes that the Company's employee relations are good.
 
LEGAL PROCEEDINGS
 
     In the ordinary  course of  its business, the  Company may  be involved  in
various  pending or threatened legal  proceedings. In management's opinion, none
of such legal proceedings will have  a material adverse effect on the  Company's
business, financial condition or operations, taken as a whole.
 
                                       43





<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                   MANAGEMENT
 
DIRECTORS, EXECUTIVE OFFICERS AND KEY EMPLOYEES
 
     The  directors, executive officers  and certain other  key employees of the
Company, their ages at April 30, 1996  and their positions with the Company  are
set  forth below. The Board  of Directors is divided  into three classes serving
staggered three-year terms.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                 NAME                    AGE                                POSITION
- --------------------------------------   ---   -------------------------------------------------------------------
<S>                                      <C>   <C>
Directors and Executive Officers:
     Leonard DiSavino.................   57    Co-Chairman of the Board of Directors, President and Chief
                                                 Executive Officer
     Philip Sacks.....................   66    Co-Chairman of the Board of Directors and Chief Operating Officer
     Mitchell Sacks...................   33    Executive Vice President -- Operations, Chief Financial Officer and
                                                 Director
     William P. Collatos..............   42    Director
     Stephen J. Gaal..................   51    Director
     Roger H. Kimmel..................   49    Director
     Kenneth T. Schiciano.............   33    Director
Key Employees:
     Roland Addis.....................   35    Vice President -- Marketing
     Ardon Beahm......................   40    Vice President -- Engineering
     Raymond Broedel..................   49    Vice President -- West Coast Operations
     Peter Buell......................   37    Vice President -- Retail Sales
     Michael LaRusso..................   37    Vice President -- Sales (Northeast Region)
     Frank Lynch......................   34    Vice President -- Sales (West Region)
     Mitchell Peipert.................   37    Vice President -- Controller
</TABLE>
 
     Mr. Leonard DiSavino founded the Company  with Philip Sacks and has  served
as  President and Chief Executive Officer since the Company's inception in 1974.
He also serves as Co-Chairman of  the Board of Directors. Prior to  establishing
the  Company, Mr.  DiSavino was Vice  President of  LIN Communications Services,
Inc. and President and Chief Executive Officer of Digital Paging Systems,  Inc.,
a subsidiary of Graphic Scanning, Inc.
 
     Mr.  Philip Sacks founded the Company  with Leonard DiSavino and has served
as Chief Operating  Officer since  the Company's  inception. He  also serves  as
Co-Chairman  of the Board  of Directors. Prior to  establishing the Company, Mr.
Sacks was  Vice President  -- Sales  of LIN  Communications Services,  Inc.  and
Executive  Vice  President  of Digital  Paging  Systems, Inc.,  a  subsidiary of
Graphic Scanning, Inc. Mr. Sacks is the father of Mitchell Sacks.
 
     Mr.  Mitchell  Sacks  joined   the  Company  in   November  1991  as   Vice
President -- Finance and has been the Chief Financial Officer and Executive Vice
President  -- Operations of the Company since January 1994. Mr. Sacks has been a
member of the  Board of  Directors since February  1994. From  1990 until  April
1991,  he  was  Northeast  Regional Manager  and,  subsequently,  Assistant Vice
President of  Banque Francaise  du  Commerce Exterieur.  From April  1991  until
November  1991, he served as  an Associate at Segal  & Co., a financial advisory
firm. Mr. Sacks is the son of Philip Sacks.
 
     Mr. William P. Collatos has been a  member of the Board of Directors  since
July  1995. Mr.  Collatos has  served as  a general  partner of  Spectrum Equity
Investors  L.P.,  a  venture   capital  fund  specializing  in   communications,
information  and media companies, since  1993. Mr. Collatos was  a partner of TA
Associates, Inc.  and  Media  Communications  Partners  from  1980  until  1993.
Spectrum  Equity Investors, as one of  the Investors, is a principal stockholder
of the Company. Mr.  Collatos is a  member of the Board  of Directors of  Galaxy
Telecom L.P. and Saga Communications.
 
     Mr.  Stephen J. Gaal has been a member of the Board of Directors since July
1995. Mr. Gaal has served as  a general partner, managing director or  principal
of  TA Associates, Inc., a private equity capital firm, and its related entities
for more  than  five  years.  Mr.  Gaal  was  a  principal  at  Chatham  Venture
Corporation,  a  venture  capital  firm.  TA Associates,  Inc.,  as  one  of the
Investors, is a principal
 
                                       44
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
stockholder of the Company. Mr.  Gaal is a member of  the Board of Directors  of
WorkGroup Technologies, Inc.
 
     Mr.  Roger H. Kimmel has been a member of the Board of Directors since July
1995. Mr. Kimmel has been a partner at the law firm of Latham & Watkins for more
than five years.
 
     Mr. Kenneth T. Schiciano has been a member of the Board of Directors  since
July 1995 and has been a principal of TA Associates, Inc. since January 1995. Mr
Schiciano  was a  Vice President  of TA Associates,  Inc. from  1989 to December
1994. Mr. Schiciano is a member of the Board of Directors of Galaxy Telecom L.P.
TA Associates, Inc., as one of the Investors, is a principal stockholder of  the
Company.
 
     Mr.   Roland   Addis   joined   the  Company   in   March   1996   as  Vice
President -- Marketing. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Addis was employed  by
AT&T as District Manager of New Business Development from May 1995 through March
1996. From September 1988 to April 1995, Mr. Addis was employed at Kraft General
Foods in various Marketing and New Product Development positions.
 
     Mr.  Ardon Beahm joined the  Company in 1976 and has  served in a number of
technical positions.  From 1986  to 1991  he  served as  Chief Engineer  of  the
Company. He has served as Vice President -- Engineering since 1991.
 
     Mr.  Raymond Broedel  joined the Company  in 1994 as  Operations Manager in
California. Mr. Broedel  was promoted in  1995 to Vice  President -- West  Coast
Operations. Prior to joining the Company, Mr. Broedel was employed in operations
management positions at Asarte Corporation from 1989 to 1994.
 
     Mr.  Peter Buell joined the Company in  1988 as a Sales Representative. Mr.
Buell was  promoted to  New York  Retail Sales  Manager in  July 1993  and  Vice
President  -- Retail Sales for the Northeast  region as of August 1994. Prior to
joining the Company, Mr. Buell was  employed in retail sales, sales support  and
direct mail advertising at several companies.
 
     Mr.  Michael  LaRusso  joined  the  Company  in  January  1987  as  a Sales
Representative. Mr. LaRusso was promoted to  New York Sales Manager in 1992  and
Vice  President -- Sales  for the Northeast  region as of  August 1994. Prior to
joining the Company, Mr. LaRusso was employed in sales positions in the  medical
industry.
 
     Mr.  Frank Lynch joined the  Company in October 1993  as General Manager of
the Company's  San Diego  location. In  1995,  Mr. Lynch  was promoted  to  Vice
President  -- Sales for the Company's West region. Prior to joining the Company,
Mr. Lynch was employed at Motorola from 1987 to 1993 in various sales  positions
in divisions related to data products.
 
     Mr. Mitchell Peipert joined the Company in April 1992 as Controller and has
served  as Vice President --  Controller since January 1994.  From 1989 to 1992,
Mr. Peipert served as  Manager for Anchin Block  and Anchin, independent  public
accountants.  From 1987 to 1989, Mr. Peipert  was employed as a senior financial
analyst for the corporate controller's group  at Merrill Lynch, Pierce Fenner  &
Smith Incorporated. Mr. Peipert is a certified public accountant.
 
COMPENSATION OF DIRECTORS
 
     Following  the  consummation of  the Offerings,  the  Company will  pay its
directors who are not officers of the Company customary fees, including fees for
each directors' meeting  and each committee  meeting attended and  reimbursement
for  traveling costs and other out-of-pocket expenses incurred in attending such
meetings. Directors who are also officers  of the Company receive no  additional
compensation for serving on the Board of Directors or its committees.
 
                                       45
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
EXECUTIVE COMPENSATION
 
     The  following table sets  forth the cash compensation  paid for the fiscal
year ended December  31, 1995 to  each of the  persons who are  the most  highly
compensated executive officers of the Company (the 'Named Executive Officers').
 
                           SUMMARY COMPENSATION TABLE
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                        ANNUAL COMPENSATION
                                                                                 ---------------------------------
                                                                                                         OTHER
NAME AND PRINCIPAL POSITION                                              YEAR     SALARY     BONUS    COMPENSATION
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------   ----    --------    -----    ------------
<S>                                                                      <C>     <C>         <C>      <C>
Leonard DiSavino .....................................................   1995    $ 75,000     $ 0       $665,836(1)
  Co-Chairman, President
  and Chief Executive Officer
Philip Sacks .........................................................   1995      75,000       0        655,538(2)
  Co-Chairman
  and Chief Operating Officer
Mitchell Sacks .......................................................   1995     170,833       0              0
  Executive Vice President Operations
  and Chief Financial Officer
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
(1) Includes  (i)  $465,000 received  as a  distribution from  the Company  as a
    return of capital, (ii) $138,774 in transactional costs paid by the  Company
    on  behalf of such person and (iii)  $62,062 as a distribution in respect of
    tax liabilities for 1995.
 
   
(2) Includes (i)  $465,000 received  as a  distribution from  the Company  as  a
    return  of capital, (ii) $138,774 in transactional costs paid by the Company
    on behalf of such person and (iii)  $51,782 as a distribution in respect  of
    tax liabilities for 1995.
    
 
   
EMPLOYMENT AGREEMENTS
    
 
   
    
 
   
     Upon  consummation of the Offerings, the Company will enter into employment
agreements ('Employment  Agreements') with  Messrs. DiSavino,  Philip Sacks  and
Mitchell  Sacks. Messrs.  DiSavino and Philip  Sacks' fiscal  1996 base salaries
will be $321,000. Mr. Mitchell Sacks' fiscal 1996 base salary will be determined
by  the  Board  of  Directors  or  the  Company's  Compensation  Committee.  The
Employment  Agreements  provide for  36 month  terms and  permit the  Company to
terminate any of the executives for  'cause' (as defined in such agreements)  or
upon  the death or,  subject to certain conditions,  including disability of the
executive. Each executive's base salary is subject to annual increase at a  rate
at  least equal to  the increase in  the Consumer Price  Index for the preceding
year and such  other increases  approved by  the Compensation  Committee. If  an
executive  remains in the  full-time employ of  the Company beyond  the 36 month
term, his Employment Agreement will continue on a month to month basis and  will
be  terminable by either party upon 30 days' written notice. During the terms of
their Employment  Agreements  and for  two  years thereafter,  each  of  Messrs.
DiSavino  and Philip Sacks has generally agreed  not to engage in business with,
or become a partner or  owner of, any business that  is in competition with  the
Company.  Mr.  Mitchell  Sacks  has  agreed that  (i)  during  the  term  of his
employment he will not engage in business with, become a partner of or undertake
planning activities for a business competitive with the Company, (ii) during the
term of his employment and for  three years thereafter, induce or influence  any
employee of the Company to terminate his employment and (iii) during the term of
his  employment and for  a period of  one year thereafter,  solicit or take away
customers of  the Company.  Each executive  will be  eligible for  discretionary
bonuses  as determined by  the Board of Directors  or the Company's Compensation
Committee, including stock options, Incentive Compensation Plan awards and other
employment incentives.
    
 
1995 PHANTOM STOCK PLAN
 
     In September 1995,  the Company  adopted the  1995 Phantom  Stock Plan  for
Employees  of TSR Paging  Inc. (the 'Phantom  Stock Plan' or  the 'Plan'), which
provides for the grant of units ('Units') representing interests in the Company.
The Phantom  Stock Plan  is intended  to assist  the Company  in attracting  and
retaining  management and  personnel with the  experience and ability  to make a
substantial contribution to the success of the Company's business. The following
summary of the Plan is qualified in  its entirety by reference to the full  text
of  the Plan, a copy of  which has been filed as  an exhibit to the Registration
Statement of which this Prospectus is a part.
 
     The Plan is currently administered by the Board of Directors (the  'Board')
of the Company. The total number of Units available under the Phantom Stock Plan
for  grants to employees of the Company  is 1,000,000. Grants of Units under the
Plan  take   the   form  of   individual   grant  agreements,   the   form   and
 
                                       46
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
substance  of which, including the  number of Units, the  Strike Price (if any),
the vesting period  and other  terms, are determined  at the  discretion of  the
Board.  The Board has the discretion to amend, suspend or terminate the plan. No
such amendment, suspension or termination may  modify the rights of a holder  of
Units under an individual grant agreement without such holder's consent.
 
     The  Phantom Stock Plan provides that the Company will be obligated to make
payments in respect of Units  only upon the happening  of a Liquidity Event.  In
lieu  of making  such payments,  the Company may  exchange rights  in respect of
Units for options  for Common Stock.  The Company intends  to grant options  for
Common  Stock in  connection with  the Offerings.  The Plan  defines a Liquidity
Event as  (i) a  Sale of  the Company  or (ii)  a Public  Offering. A  Sale  for
purposes  of  the Plan  is defined  as (i)  the consolidation  or merger  of the
Company with or into any other Person, (ii) the sale or transfer by the  Company
of  all or substantially  all of its assets,  (iii) the sale  or transfer by the
Stockholders (as defined in the Plan) of more than 50% of the outstanding equity
interests of  the Company  or (iv)  the approval  of a  plan of  liquidation  or
dissolution  of the Company, except,  in the case of  clauses (i) through (iii),
for transactions with a Stockholder or an Affiliate (as defined in the Plan)  of
a Stockholder. A Public Offering for purposes of the Plan is defined as a public
offering in which (i) the aggregate valuation, subject to certain exceptions, of
the  outstanding Common Stock of the  Company immediately prior to such offering
is not less than $215,000,000, (ii) proceeds to the Company, net of underwriting
discounts and commissions, are at least $50,000,000, (iii) the Notes are  repaid
and  (iv) the shares  of the Company's Common  Stock are listed  on the New York
Stock Exchange or quoted on the Nasdaq National Market.
 
     The Plan provides  that if the  Liquidity Event is  a Public Offering,  the
holder  of Units  will be  entitled to  receive either  cash or  options, at the
discretion of the Board. The Offerings  will constitute a Liquidity Event  under
the Plan. In connection with the Offerings, the Company intends to grant options
for  Common Stock to holders of  Units. If the Liquidity Event  is a Sale of the
Company, the holders of  Units will be  entitled to receive  either cash or  the
form  of consideration received  in such Sale,  in the discretion  of the Board.
Holders of  Units  under the  Plan  do not  have  the rights  or  privileges  of
stockholders of the Company.
 
   
STOCK OPTION PLANS
    
 
   
Employee Option Plan
    
 
   
     In  June 1996, the  Company adopted the  TSR Paging Inc.  1996 Stock Option
Plan for Employees and  Consultants (the 'Employee  Option Plan'). The  Employee
Option Plan permits the grant of non-qualified stock options and incentive stock
options  to  purchase shares  of Common  Stock  covering 661,764  authorized but
unissued or reacquired shares of Common Stock, subject to adjustment to  reflect
events  such  as stock  dividends, stock  splits, recapitalizations,  mergers or
reorganizations of  or by  the Company.  No individual  may be  granted  options
covering more than 220,588 shares in any calendar year.
    
 
   
     Unless  sooner terminated  by the Board  of Directors,  the Employee Option
Plan will expire on June 30, 2006. Such termination will not affect the validity
of any  option  outstanding  under the  Employee  Option  Plan on  the  date  of
termination.
    
 
   
     The  Employee Option Plan is administered  by the Compensation Committee of
the Board of  Directors of  the Company  (the 'Committee')  and options  granted
under  the Plan may, in  the Committee's discretion, be  intended to satisfy the
applicable exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3 under the Securities Exchange  Act
of  1934, as amended (the  'Rule 16b-3'), and, if  applicable, Section 162(m) of
the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the 'Code'). Subject to the terms
and conditions of the Employee Option  Plan, the Committee has the authority  to
select the persons to whom options are to be granted, to designate the number of
shares  of Common Stock to be covered by such options, to determine the exercise
price of options, to establish the  period of exercisability of options, and  to
make  all  other  determinations and  to  take  all other  actions  necessary or
advisable for the administration of the Employee Option Plan. The Committee may,
in its discretion,  provide by  the terms  of an  option that  such option  will
expire  at specified  times following, or  become exercisable in  full upon, the
occurrence of  certain specified  'extraordinary corporate  events' including  a
merger,  consolidation or dissolution of the Company, or a sale of substantially
all of the Company's assets, or  upon the optionee's termination of  employment,
death, disability or retirement.
    
 
                                       47
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
     In  the case of an incentive stock option granted to an individual who owns
(or is deemed to  own) at least 10%  of the total combined  voting power of  all
classes  of stock of the Company, the Employee Option Plan further provides that
the exercise price must be at least 110% of the fair market value of a share  of
Common  Stock on the date of grant. With respect to incentive stock options, the
Employee Option  Plan further  provides  that the  aggregate fair  market  value
(determined  at the time the  option is granted) of  shares under options (under
the Employee  Option  Plan  and  any  other  plan  of  the  Company)  which  are
exercisable for the first time during any calendar year may not exceed $100,000.
    
 
   
     The  Committee also  retains the  discretion to  determine that outstanding
options under  the  Employee Option  Plan  will expire  upon  certain  specified
'extraordinary  corporate events,' but in such event the Committee may also give
optionees the right to  exercise their outstanding options  in full during  some
period prior to such event, even though the rights have not yet otherwise become
fully exercisable.
    
 
   
     The  Employee Option Plan permits the  payment of the option exercise price
to be made in cash (which, except  with respect to incentive stock options,  may
include an assignment of the right to receive the cash proceeds from the sale of
Common  Stock subject to the Option pursuant to a 'cashless exercise' procedure)
or by delivery of shares  of Common Stock valued at  their fair market value  on
the  date  of  exercise or  by  delivery of  other  property, or  by  a recourse
promissory note payable to the Company, or by a combination of the foregoing.
    
 
   
     Options granted under the  Employee Option Plan  shall not be  transferable
otherwise than by will, by the laws of descent and distribution or pursuant to a
domestic  relations order (as defined in the Code) that satisfies the applicable
exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3, and  may be exercised during the  optionee's
lifetime  only  by  the  optionee  or, in  the  event  of  the  optionee's legal
disability, by the optionee's legal representative.
    
 
   
     The Employee  Option Plan  may  be amended  by  the Committee,  subject  to
shareholder  approval if such approval is then  required by applicable law or in
order for the Employee Option Plan or any options granted thereunder to continue
to satisfy the applicable exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3 or, if  applicable,
Code Section 162(m), as determined by the Committee.
    
 
   
     In   connection  with  the   Offerings,  holders  of   Units  will  receive
non-qualified   stock   options   under   the   Employee   Option   Plan.    See
'Management  -- 1995 Phantom Stock Plan.'  Because the number of options granted
to each holder of vested Units depends on the Company's aggregate proceeds  from
the  Offerings, it is not possible to  determine the exact number of shares with
respect to which options shall be so  granted. It is anticipated that Mr.  Sacks
will  receive options  to purchase  approximately 77,646  shares at  an exercise
price of $8.50 per share. Other employees as a group (excluding Mr. Sacks)  will
receive options to purchase approximately 163,703 shares at an exercise price of
$8.50  per share. All of  such options shall expire  on the tenth anniversary of
the grant date, subject to acceleration  as described above upon the  occurrence
of  an 'extraordinary corporate event' and  subject to earlier expiration in the
event of the optionee's termination  of employment. Such options generally  vest
over  a  period  of  between one  and  five  years from  the  completion  of the
Offerings. Because the value  of the options granted  under the Employee  Option
Plan  depends on the future market value of  a share of Common Stock on the date
of exercise and such value is not presently determinable, no new Benefits  Table
has been provided.
    
 
   
Non-Employee Director Option Plan
    
 
   
     In  June 1996 the Company adopted the TSR Paging Inc. Non-Employee Director
Option  Plan  (the  'Director  Option  Plan').  The  Director  Option  Plan   is
administered  by the  Board of  Directors of  the Company  (the 'Board')  and is
intended to  satisfy the  applicable  exemptive conditions  of Rule  16b-3.  The
Director  Option  Plan  provides  for  grants  of  non-qualified  stock  options
('Options') covering  50,000 authorized  but unissued  or reacquired  shares  of
Common  Stock, subject to adjustment to  reflect events such as stock dividends,
stock splits,  recapitalizations,  mergers  or  reorganizations  of  or  by  the
Company.
    
 
   
     Unless  sooner terminated  by the Board,  the Director Plan  will expire on
June 30,  2006. Such  termination will  not affect  the validity  of any  option
outstanding on the date of termination.
    
 
   
     To  the extent necessary to satisfy  the applicable exemptive conditions of
Rule 16b-3, options under the Director  Option Plan will be granted pursuant  to
the following 'formula grant' terms: when initially
    
 
                                       48
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
appointed  or elected to the  Board or if on the  Board upon consummation of the
Offerings, an Independent Director shall be granted an option to purchase shares
of Common  Stock and  each Independent  Director serving  as a  director of  the
Company  as of  the close  of each  subsequent annual  shareholder's meeting (or
following the  termination  of the  vesting  period  of the  options)  at  which
directors  are elected shall be  granted an option to  purchase shares of Common
Stock, in such amounts as determined by the Compensation Committee or the  Board
of  Directors. The exercise  price of options granted  under the Director Option
Plan shall be the fair market  value of a share of  Common Stock on the date  of
grant  and each option will become exercisable in cumulative annual installments
of one-third on  each of the  first three  anniversaries of the  date of  grant,
subject to acceleration to the extent permitted by Rule 16b-3; provided, that no
portion  of  an  option which  is  unexercisable at  the  Independent Director's
termination  of  directorship  will  thereafter  become  exercisable.  Upon  the
occurrence  of a 'Change in Control' of  the Company (as defined in the Director
Option Plan)  all  outstanding  options shall  become  immediately  exercisable;
provided  however, that no portion  of an option shall  be exercisable after the
tenth anniversary of  the date of  grant and no  portion of an  option shall  be
exercisable   following  the  first  anniversary   of  the  termination  of  the
Independent Director's services as director of the Company.
    
 
   
     To the  extent permitted  by the  applicable exemptive  conditions of  Rule
16b-3,  the Board, subject  to the terms  and conditions of  the Director Option
Plan, has the authority to select the Independent Directors to whom options  are
to  be granted, to designate the number of  shares of Common Stock to be covered
by such options, to  determine the exercise price  of options, to establish  the
period of exercisability of options, and to make all other determinations and to
take  all other  actions necessary  or advisable  for the  administration of the
Director Option  Plan.  To the  extent  permitted by  the  applicable  exemptive
conditions of Rule 16b-3, the Board may, in its discretion, provide by the terms
of  an option  that such  option will  expire at  specified times  following, or
become  exercisable  in   full  upon,  the   occurrence  of  certain   specified
'extraordinary  corporate events' including a Change in Control or other merger,
consolidation or dissolution of the Company,  or a sale of substantially all  of
the  Company's assets, or upon the optionee's termination of directorship, death
or disability  and  may retain  the  discretion to  determine  that  outstanding
options  under  the  Director Option  Plan  will expire  upon  certain specified
'extraordinary corporate events,'  but in  such event  the Board  may also  give
optionees  the right to  exercise their outstanding options  in full during some
period prior  to such  event, even  though the  options have  not yet  otherwise
become fully exercisable.
    
 
   
     The  Director Option Plan permits the  payment of the option exercise price
to be made in cash (which, may include an assignment of the right to receive the
cash proceeds from the sale of Common Stock subject to the Option pursuant to  a
'cashless  exercise' procedure) or by delivery  of shares of Common Stock valued
at their fair  market value  on the  date of exercise  or by  delivery of  other
property,  or by  a recourse  promissory note  payable to  the Company,  or by a
combination of the foregoing.
    
 
   
     Options granted under the  Director Option Plan  shall not be  transferable
otherwise than by will, by the laws of descent and distribution or pursuant to a
domestic  relations order (as defined in the Code) that satisfies the applicable
exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3, and  may be exercised during the  optionee's
lifetime  only  by  the  optionee  or, in  the  event  of  the  optionee's legal
disability, by the optionee's legal representative.
    
 
   
     The  Director  Option  Plan  may  be  amended  by  the  Board,  subject  to
shareholder  approval if such approval is then  required by applicable law or in
order for the Director Option Plan or options granted thereunder to continue  to
satisfy  the applicable exemptive conditions of Rule 16b-3, as determined by the
Board in its discretion.
    
 
   
CERTAIN FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES WITH RESPECT TO OPTIONS UNDER THE
EMPLOYEE OPTION PLAN AND THE DIRECTOR OPTION PLAN
    
 
   
     Tax counsel for the Company has  advised that under current law certain  of
the  federal income  tax consequences  to optionees  and the  Company of Options
granted under  the Employee  Option  Plan or  the  Director Option  Plan  should
generally  be as set forth in the  following summary. An optionee generally will
not recognize taxable income on the grant of a non-qualified stock option  under
the  Employee  Option  Plan or  the  Director  Option Plan,  but  will recognize
ordinary income on the exercise
    
 
                                       49
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
of such option. The  amount of income  recognized on the  exercise of an  option
generally  will be equal to the excess, if  any, of the fair market value of the
shares at the time of  exercise over the aggregate  exercise price paid for  the
shares, regardless of whether the exercise price is paid in cash or in shares or
other property. Where ordinary income is recognized by an optionee in connection
with  the exercise  of an option,  the Company  generally will be  entitled to a
deduction equal to the amount of ordinary income so recognized.
    
 
   
     An optionee generally  will not  recognize taxable income  upon either  the
grant or exercise of an incentive stock option granted under the Employee Option
Plan. Generally, upon the sale or other taxable disposition of the shares of the
Common  Stock acquired upon exercise of  an incentive stock option, the optionee
will recognize long-term capital gain in an amount equal to the excess, if  any,
of  the  amount realized  in such  disposition over  the option  exercise price,
provided that no disposition of the shares has taken place within either (a) two
years from the date of grant of the incentive stock option or (b) one year  from
the  date of exercise. If  the shares of the Common  Stock are sold or otherwise
disposed of before the end of the one-year and two-year periods specified above,
the difference between the  incentive stock option exercise  price and the  fair
market  value of the shares on the date of the incentive stock option's exercise
generally will be taxable as ordinary income; the balance of the amount realized
from such disposition, if any, will be  taxed as capital gain. If the shares  of
the  Common Stock  are disposed  of before  the expiration  of the  one-year and
two-year periods and the amount realized is  less than the fair market value  of
the  shares at the date of exercise, the optionee's ordinary income generally is
limited to the excess, if any, of  the amount realized in such disposition  over
the  option exercise  price paid.  The Company  (or other  employer corporation)
generally will be entitled to a tax deduction with respect to an incentive stock
option only to the extent  the optionee has ordinary  income upon sale or  other
disposition of the shares of the Common Stock.
    
 
   
     The  rules governing the tax treatment of options and an optionee's receipt
of shares in connection with such grants are quite technical, so that the  above
description  of tax consequences  is necessarily general in  nature and does not
purport to be complete. Moreover,  statutory provisions are, of course,  subject
to  change,  as are  their interpretations,  and their  application may  vary in
individual circumstances. Finally, the  tax consequences under applicable  state
law may not be the same as under the federal income tax laws.
    
 
   
EMPLOYEE STOCK PURCHASE PLAN
    
 
   
     The  Board of  Directors intends to  adopt an Employee  Stock Purchase Plan
(the 'Purchase Plan') immediately prior to the consummation of the Offering. The
purpose of the Purchase Plan is  to allow eligible employees to purchase  Common
Stock  pursuant  to payroll  deductions  as described  below  and to  provide an
incentive for them to promote the continued success of the Company. The Purchase
Plan is intended to be an 'employee  stock purchase plan' within the meaning  of
Section 423 of the Code.
    
 
   
     The  Purchase Plan will permit the purchase of up to 250,000 authorized but
unissued or reacquired shares of Common Stock, subject to adjustment to  reflect
events  such  as stock  dividends, stock  splits, recapitalizations,  mergers or
reorganizations of or by the Company.
    
 
   
     The Purchase Plan will  be administered by a  committee of officers of  the
Company   appointed  by  the  Board  of  Directors  (the  'Stock  Purchase  Plan
Committee'). The Purchase Plan Committee is authorized to interpret the Purchase
Plan and  to make  and adopt  rules and  regulations not  inconsistent with  the
provisions of the Purchase Plan. Purchase Plan Committee members may participate
in the Purchase Plan.
    
 
   
     The  Board of Directors without stockholder approval may amend the Purchase
Plan at any time, except that  stockholder approval is required to increase  the
number  of  shares issuable  under the  Purchase  Plan, increase  materially the
benefits accruing to participants, or modify the requirements as to  eligibility
for participation in the Purchase Plan. Unless sooner terminated by the Board of
Directors,  the Purchase  Plan will  terminate in ten  years or  when all Common
Stock subject to the  Purchase Plan has been  purchased by employees,  whichever
shall occur first.
    
 
   
     Participation  in the Purchase Plan is  voluntary. Subject to certain rules
applicable to those  officers of the  Company who are  subject to the  reporting
requirements  of Section 16(a)  of the Exchange  Act, and a  requirement that no
employee who  owns (with  application of  attribution rules)  5 percent  of  the
voting  stock may participate, all employees of the Company and its subsidiaries
(including the Named
    
 
                                       50
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
Executive Officers), other  than those who  are scheduled to  work less than  20
hours  per week  and those  whose customary  employment is  for not  more than 5
months in any calendar  year, are eligible to  participate in an offering  under
the  Purchase Plan. The number of shares  that a participant may purchase in any
calendar year under the Purchase Plan is limited to that number of shares having
a fair market value (determined at  the commencement of the offering period)  of
$25,000.  Rights under the  Purchase Plan are  nontransferable otherwise than by
will or the laws of descent and distribution.
    
 
   
     Except for  the  first  offering  under the  Purchase  Plan  (the  'Initial
Offering'),  offerings under the Purchase Plan  normally will be made on January
1, April 1, July 1 and October 1 of each year. The Initial Offering will be made
shortly  after  effectiveness  of  the  Registration  Statement  of  which  this
Prospectus is a part.
    
 
   
     An  offering  affords each  eligible  employee an  opportunity  to purchase
shares of Common Stock at a 15% discount from fair market value as determined in
accordance with  the terms  of the  Purchase Plan.  Under the  Delaware  General
Corporation  Law, the Company may not issue shares  at a price less than the par
value of a share of Common Stock. Purchases under the Purchase Plan are made  by
means of payroll deductions, generally over the three-month offering period. The
amount  deducted each payroll period must be at least $5 and must be equal to at
least 1%  of the  participating  employee's compensation  as defined  under  the
Purchase  Plan, and is credited  to a Purchase Plan  account established in such
employee's name. For a participating employee, the amount in his or her  account
on  the last  day of the  offering period  is applied, without  interest, to the
purchase of the number  of whole shares  of Common Stock  that such amount  will
purchase at the lower price of
    
 
   
          (i)  85% of the  fair market value of  a share of  Common Stock on the
     first day of  the offering period,  i.e., the first  day of the  applicable
     calendar quarter; or
    
 
   
          (ii)  85% of the fair  market value of a share  of Common Stock on the
     last day  of  the offering  period,  i.e., the  last  day of  the  calendar
     quarter.
    
 
   
     In  the case of the Initial Offering, the amount determined under (i) above
will be 85% of the Offering Price  and the amount determined under (ii) will  be
85% of the fair market value of a share of Common Stock on September 30, 1996.
    
 
   
     If an offering under the Purchase Plan is oversubscribed, any balance in an
employee's  account not applied to the purchase  of Common Stock is carried over
to the next offering period.
    
 
   
     An employee may withdraw from an offering at any time prior to the last day
of the offering period and all accumulated payroll deductions will be  refunded.
No  interest will  be paid on  the amount  withdrawn from the  Purchase Plan. An
employee cannot discontinue payroll deductions within an offering period without
the withdrawal of all  payroll deductions previously  made during that  offering
period and the termination of his or her participation in that offering.
    
 
   
CERTAIN FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSEQUENCES WITH RESPECT TO THE PURCHASE PLAN
    
 
   
     Generally, a participant will not recognize income at the time of the grant
of  a purchase right under the Purchase Plan (that is, on the date of offering).
Nor will a participant recognize income on the exercise of such a purchase right
(that is, on the date of purchase),  provided that at no time during the  period
beginning  with the date of the granting of the purchase right and ending on the
date three  months before  the date  of  exercise of  such purchase  right,  the
participant  ceased to be an  employee of the Company  for any reason other than
death (the 'employment  requirement'). Under these  circumstances, no  deduction
will  be  allowable to  the Company  in connection  with either  the grant  of a
purchase right or the issuance of shares upon exercise thereof.
    
 
   
     If a  participant  who satisfies  the  employment requirement  disposes  of
shares  acquired upon the exercise  of a purchase right  two years or more after
the time of the grant of the purchase right (including a disposition at  death),
the  participant generally will recognize ordinary  income at that time equal to
the lesser  of (i)  the fair  market value  of the  shares at  the time  of  the
disposition  over the amount paid for the shares, or (ii) 15% of the fair market
value of the shares at the time the purchase right was granted. If a participant
who satisfies  the  employment  requirement disposes  of  shares  acquired  upon
exercise of a purchase right within two years after the time of the grant of the
purchase  right, the participant generally will recognize ordinary income at the
time of the  disposition equal to  the excess of  the fair market  value of  the
shares at the time of exercise over the purchase price. Any such ordinary income
recognized  by a  participant will  be added to  the participant's  basis in the
shares. If a disposition
    
 
                                       51
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
described in this paragraph occurs in a taxable transaction, any gain in  excess
of  ordinary income recognized on the disposition  will be capital gain, and any
loss will be capital loss.
    
 
   
     If a participant fails for any reason other than the participant's death or
certain temporary leaves of absence  to meet the employment requirements,  then,
upon  the receipt of  shares upon such exercise,  the participant generally will
recognize ordinary income equal to  the excess of the  fair market value of  the
shares over the amount paid for such shares.
    
 
   
     If  a  participant recognizes  ordinary  income as  a  result of  either an
exercise of a purchase right or a  disposition of shares, then the Company  will
be  entitled to a deduction  in the same amount,  provided the Company satisfies
any applicable federal income tax withholding requirements.
    
 
   
     The rules governing employee stock  purchase plans are quite technical,  so
that the above description of tax consequences is general in nature and does not
purport to be complete. Moreover, statutory provisions are subject to change, as
are  their  interpretations,  and  their  application  may  vary  in  individual
circumstances. Finally, the consequences under applicable state and local income
tax laws may not be the same as under the federal income tax laws.
    
 
COMPENSATION COMMITTEE INTERLOCKS AND INSIDER PARTICIPATION
 
   
     At December 31, 1995, the Company had not created a compensation  committee
or  an  audit  committee of  its  Board  of Directors.  In  connection  with the
Offerings, the Company will establish both a compensation committee and an audit
committee of its Board of Directors, and it is anticipated that the compensation
committee  and  the  audit  committee  will  consist  of  not  fewer  than   two
non-employee   directors.  Prior  to  the   Offerings,  decisions  on  executive
compensation  were generally made by Messrs.  Leonard DiSavino and Philip Sacks,
subject, in the case of Messrs. DiSavino  and  Sacks,  to  approval by the Board
of Directors and in the case of Mitchell Sacks, to review by a representative of
the Investors.
    
 
                                       52
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
              CERTAIN RELATIONSHIPS AND RELATED PARTY TRANSACTIONS
 
   
     In July  1995, the  Investors purchased  from Leonard  DiSavino and  Philip
Sacks  (i) the  Notes for $34.0  million with  an aggregate face  value of $70.0
million, which are the  non-recourse obligations of  Messrs. DiSavino and  Sacks
and  (ii) the  Option for  $1 million  to purchase  40.66% of  the fully-diluted
common stock,  including  phantom  stock,  of  the  Company  from  the  Founding
Stockholders  in exchange for  a portion of  the Notes. The  Investors intend to
exercise the  Option simultaneous  with  the consummation  of the  Offerings.  A
portion  of the proceeds from the Offerings will  be used to pay the Dividend to
the Founding Stockholders, which  payment will be used  by Messrs. DiSavino  and
Sacks to repay in part the Notes. The Notes will be satisfied in connection with
the exercise of the Option. See 'Use of Proceeds.'
    
 
     In  connection with the purchase and sale  of the Notes and the Option, the
Company, the Operating  Entities, the  Founding Stockholders  and the  Investors
entered  into a Securities Purchase Agreement (the  'SPA'), dated as of July 17,
1995. Under the SPA  the Company may not,  among other things, allow  amendments
(subject to certain exceptions) to its certificate of incorporation, consolidate
or  merge with or into any other  entity, make any loans or investments (subject
to certain exceptions) in  any other entity,  make any dividends  on any of  its
capital  stock or  sell additional  securities (except  for sales  of additional
securities pursuant to a Qualified Public Offering (as defined in the SPA)).
 
   
     The parties to the  SPA also entered into  the Investment Agreement,  which
provides  the Investors with  the right to  elect three members  of the Board of
Directors of the Company.  In addition, the  Investment Agreement also  provides
that  the Company will use its reasonable efforts to include, subject to certain
exceptions, all or a  portion of the Registrable  Securities (as defined  below)
held  by the Investors in registrations  of securities under the Securities Act.
If the registration  relates to  a primary offering,  the Company  will pay  all
expenses  of the registration  except for underwriting  commissions and transfer
taxes on stock attributable to the Registrable Securities. If such  registration
relates  exclusively to a  secondary offering all  selling stockholders will pay
their proportionate  share of  the expenses  of the  registration and  offering,
except expenses the Company would have incurred whether or not such registration
had  occurred. In  connection with the  Offerings, the Investors  have agreed to
waive their  registration  rights  with  respect  to  the  Offerings  under  the
Investment  Agreement  and  the  Company  has  granted  the  Investors  a  shelf
registration right which becomes exercisable  one year after the effective  date
of the Offerings.
    
 
     The  Investment Agreement further  provides that after  the Company's first
underwritten public offering of securities, one or more of the Investors holding
at least ten percent of the Registrable Securities will be able to request  that
the  Company  register  under  the  Securities  Act  its  or  their  Registrable
Securities on any four occasions, provided  that each such registration must  be
at  least  twelve months  apart.  The Investment  Agreement  defines Registrable
Securities as any stock of the Company  purchased by, or issued to, an  Investor
including  without limitation any stock issued  or issuable upon exercise of the
Option and any stock issued or issuable  in connection with a stock dividend  or
stock split or otherwise.
 
     In  connection with the Offerings, the Investors will give Messrs. DiSavino
and Sacks an irrevocable proxy to  vote approximately 17.3% of the Common  Stock
of the Company held by the Investors.
 
     In  connection with the SPA and the purchase  and sale of the Notes and the
Options, the  Company extended  loans  to Messrs.  DiSavino and  Sacks  totaling
$1,049,140,  to pay certain  fees and expenses of  such transactions. Such loans
are noninterest bearing, have no defined repayment terms and are reflected as  a
reduction to capital (deficit) in the financial statements of the Company. Prior
to  consummation  of the  Offerings, the  Company forgave  the loans  to Messrs.
DiSavino and Sacks.
 
   
     Tax Indemnification Agreement.  Prior  to the completion of the  Offerings,
the  Company and the Founding Stockholders will enter into a tax indemnification
agreement (the  'Tax  Agreement').  Subject  to  certain  limitations,  the  Tax
Agreement  generally  provides  that  the Company  will  be  indemnified  by the
Founding Stockholders on a pro rata basis, and the Founding Stockholders will be
indemnified by the Company, for increases in taxes and certain other costs  that
result  from a reallocation by a taxing  authority of taxable income between the
period before the date of this Prospectus,  in which the Company has been  taxed
as  an  S  Corporation  and  certain  predecessors  have  been  treated  for tax
    
 
                                       53
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
purposes as S  Corporations or  in one  case as  a partnership,  and the  period
commencing on the date of this Prospectus, in which the Company will be taxed as
a  C Corporation. The  amount payable by  the Company or  a Founding Stockholder
with respect to a reallocation will be limited to the tax benefit derived by the
Company  or  the  Founding  Stockholder,  respectively,  as  a  result  of   the
reallocation.
    
 
     Mr.  Roger H. Kimmel,  a director of the  Company, is a  member of Latham &
Watkins. Latham  & Watkins  has represented  the Company  from time  to time  in
various matters, including the Offerings. See 'Legal Matters.'
 
                                       54
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                             PRINCIPAL STOCKHOLDERS
 
     The  following table (i)  assumes that the Option  has been exercised, (ii)
assumes that grants under the Phantom  Stock Plan are converted into options  to
purchase  Common Stock and,  (iii) sets forth  certain information regarding the
beneficial ownership of the Common Stock (X) immediately prior to the  Offerings
and (Y) as adjusted to reflect the sale of the Common Stock in the Offerings, by
(1)  each person known by the Company to be the beneficial owner of more than 5%
of the outstanding  shares of Common  Stock, (2) each  director, (3) each  Named
Executive Officer and (4) all directors and executive officers of the Company as
a group. Unless otherwise noted in the footnotes to the table, the persons named
in  the table have sole voting and investing power with respect to all shares of
Common Stock indicated as being beneficially owned by them.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                  BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP OF COMMON       BENEFICIAL OWNERSHIP OF COMMON
                                                   STOCK PRIOR TO THE OFFERINGS           STOCK AFTER THE OFFERINGS
                                                -----------------------------------  -----------------------------------
               BENEFICIAL OWNER                     NUMBER            PERCENT            NUMBER            PERCENT
- ----------------------------------------------  --------------  -------------------  --------------  -------------------
<S>                                             <C>             <C>                  <C>             <C>
Leonard DiSavino(1) ..........................     3,077,203               29.1%        3,077,203               20.5%
    c/o TSR Paging Inc.
    400 Kelby Street
    Fort Lee, NJ 07024
Philip Sacks(2) ..............................     3,077,203               29.1         3,077,203               20.5
    c/o TSR Paging Inc.
    400 Kelby Street
    Fort Lee, NJ 07024
Mitchell Sacks(3) ............................            --                --                 --               --
    c/o TSR Paging Inc.
    400 Kelby Street
    Fort Lee, NJ 07024
TA Associates Group(4) .......................     2,710,894               25.6         2,710,894               18.1
    125 High Street
    Suite 2500
    Boston, MA 02110
Spectrum Equity Investors L.P.(5) ............       893,094                8.4           893,094                6.0
    125 High Street
    Suite 2600
    Boston, MA 02110
St. Paul Venture Capital, Inc.(6) ............       633,560                6.0           633,560                4.2
    8500 Normandale Lake Blvd.
    Suite 1940
    Bloomingdale, MN 55437
William P. Collatos(5) .......................            --                --                 --                --
    c/o Spectrum Equity Investors L.P.
    125 High Street
    Suite 2600
    Boston, MA 02110
Stephen J. Gaal(7) ...........................         4,893          *                     4,893          *
    c/o TA Associates, Inc.
    125 High Street
    Suite 2500
    Boston, MA 02110
Roger H. Kimmel(8) ...........................            --                --                 --                --
    885 Third Avenue
    Suite 1000
    New York, NY 10022
Kenneth T. Schiciano(9) ......................         4,893          *                     4,893          *
    c/o TA Associates, Inc.
    125 High Street
    Suite 2500
    Boston, MA 02110
Directors and Named Executive Officers as a
    group (seven persons) ....................     6,164,192               58.2%        6,164,192               41.1%
</TABLE>
    
 
                                       55
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
*  Less than 1%.
 
   
(1) Includes (i)  635,294  shares  held  in  a trust  for  the  benefit  of  Mr.
    DiSavino's  children (the 'DiSavino Trust') and  (ii) 476,755 shares held in
    three separate grantor retained  annuity trusts (each,  a 'GRAT'), of  which
    GRATs   Messrs.  DiSavino  and  Sacks  are  co-trustees.  Mr.  DiSavino  has
    disclaimed beneficial ownership of all of  the shares in the DiSavino  Trust
    and  the  GRATs.  Pursuant  to the  Stockholders  Agreement  (as  defined in
    'Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions'), the DiSavino  Trust
    granted Mr. DiSavino an irrevocable proxy to vote the shares of Common Stock
    of the Company held by the DiSavino Trust.
    
 
   
(2) Includes  (i) 635,294  shares held  in a trust  for the  benefit of Mitchell
    Sacks (the 'Mitchell  Sacks Trust') and  (ii) 476,755 shares  held in  three
    separate  GRATs, of which GRATs Messrs.  DiSavino and Sacks are co-trustees.
    Mr. Sacks has disclaimed  beneficial ownership of all  of the shares in  the
    Mitchell  Sacks Trust and the GRATs. Pursuant to the Stockholders Agreement,
    the Mitchell Sacks Trust granted Mr. Sacks an irrevocable proxy to vote  the
    shares of Common Stock of the Company held by the Mitchell Sacks Trust.
    
 
   
(3) Mr.  Mitchell Sacks is the beneficiary of a trust which holds 635,294 shares
    of Common Stock. Mr. Philip  Sacks has the right to  vote such shares for  a
    five-year period.
    
 
   
(4) Includes 2,004,273 shares held by TSR Investment L.L.C., 316,235 shares held
    by Advent VI L.P., 215,912 shares held by Advent Industrial II L.P., 139,579
    shares  held by Advent  New York L.P.  and 34,895 shares  held by TA Venture
    Investors Limited Partnership. TSR Investment L.L.C., Advent VI L.P., Advent
    Industrial II L.P., Advent  New York L.P. and  TA Venture Investors  Limited
    Partnership  are part of an affiliated group of investment vehicles referred
    to collectively as the  TA Associates Group. The  members of TSR  Investment
    L.L.C.  are Advent  VII L.P.  and Advent  Atlantic and  Pacific II  L.P. The
    general partner of Advent  VII L.P. is TA  Associates VII, L.P. The  general
    partner  of  Advent  Atlantic  and  Pacific  II  Limited  Partnership  is TA
    Associates AAP II Partners, L.P. The  general partner of each of Advent  VI,
    L.P.,  Advent New York, L.P. and Advent Industrial II, L.P. is TA Associates
    VI, L.P.  The  general  partner of  each  of  TA Associates  VII,  L.P.,  TA
    Associates  VI,  L.P.  and  TA  Associates  AAP  II  Partners,  L.P.  is  TA
    Associates, Inc. In such capacity, TA Associates, Inc. exercises sole voting
    and investment power with respect to all of the shares held of record by the
    named investment  partnerships,  with the  exception  of those  held  by  TA
    Venture Investors, L.P.; individually no stockholder, director or officer of
    TA  Associates, Inc. is  deemed to have  or share such  voting or investment
    power. Principals and employees of  TA Associates, Inc. (including Mr.  Gaal
    and  Mr. Schiciano, directors of the  Company) comprise the general partners
    of TA Venture Investors,  L.P. In such  capacity, each of  Mr. Gaal and  Mr.
    Schiciano may be deemed to share voting and investment power with respect to
    34,895  shares held of record by TA Venture Investors, L.P. Messrs. Gaal and
    Schiciano disclaim beneficial ownership of such shares, except to the extent
    of the 4,893  shares and  4,893 shares, in  which they  respectively hold  a
    pecuniary interest.
    
 
(5) Mr.  Collatos, a director of  the Company, is a  general partner of Spectrum
    Equity Investors L.P. Mr. Collatos disclaims beneficial ownership of  shares
    held by Spectrum Equity Investors L.P.
 
   
(6) St. Paul Venture Capital, Inc. is a wholly owned subsidiary of St. Paul Fire
    and Marine Insurance Company, which is the owner of record.
    
 
   
(7) Mr.  Gaal is  a director of  the Company.  Includes 4,893 shares  held by TA
    Venture Investors, L.P.,  all of  which are  included in  the 34,895  shares
    described  in footnote (4) above. Mr. Gaal disclaims beneficial ownership to
    such shares, except to the extent of the 4,893 shares as to which he holds a
    pecuniary interest.  Does not  include any  shares owned  by TSR  Investment
    L.L.C.,  Advent VI L.P., Advent Industrial II  L.P. or Advent New York L.P.,
    as to which Mr. Gaal disclaims beneficial ownership.
    
 
   
(8) Mr. Kimmel is a  trustee under the DiSavino  Trust and Mitchell Sacks  Trust
    but disclaims beneficial ownership of the shares held by such trusts.
    
 
   
(9) Mr. Schiciano is a director of the Company. Includes 4,893 shares held by TA
    Venture  Investors, L.P.,  all of  which are  included in  the 34,895 shares
    described  in  footnote  (4)  above.  Mr.  Schiciano  disclaims   beneficial
    ownership  to such shares,  except to the  extent of the  4,893 shares as to
    which he holds a  pecuniary interest. Does not  include any shares owned  by
    TSR  Investment L.L.C., Advent VI L.P.,  Advent Industrial II L.P. or Advent
    New York L.P. as to which Mr. Schiciano disclaims beneficial ownership.
    
 
                                       56
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                          DESCRIPTION OF CAPITAL STOCK
 
     At the date of the Offerings,  the authorized capital stock of the  Company
will consist of 20,000,000 shares of common stock, par value $.01 per share, and
1,000,000  shares of preferred  stock, par value $.01  per share (the 'Preferred
Stock').
 
COMMON STOCK
 
     The holders of Common Stock are entitled to one vote for each share held of
record on all matters submitted to  a vote of the stockholders. The  Certificate
of  Incorporation does not provide for  cumulative voting, and, accordingly, the
holders of a  majority of the  outstanding shares  have the power  to elect  all
directors.  The quorum required at a  stockholders' meeting for consideration of
any matter  is  a majority  of  the shares  entitled  to vote  on  that  matter,
represented  in person or by proxy. If a quorum is present, the affirmative vote
of a majority of the shares voting on the matter at the meeting is required  for
stockholder approval.
 
     Holders  of Common Stock will  have no preemptive, subscription, conversion
or similar rights. There are no redemption or sinking fund provisions applicable
to the  Common Stock.  Subject to  preferences  that may  be applicable  to  any
then-outstanding  Preferred  Stock,  holders  of Common  Stock  are  entitled to
receive ratably dividends when,  as, and if declared  by the Board of  Directors
out   of  funds  legally  available  therefor.  In  the  event  of  liquidation,
dissolution or winding up of the  Company, holders of Common Stock are  entitled
to  share ratably in  all assets of  the Company remaining  after the payment of
liabilities and  the liquidation  preference of  any then-outstanding  Preferred
Stock.  All outstanding  shares of  Common Stock are,  and all  shares of Common
Stock to be outstanding upon completion of the Offering will be, fully paid  and
nonassessable.
 
     Under  the Communications Act,  not more than 20%  of the Company's capital
stock may be owned of record by  other than United States citizens or  entities.
The  Certificate  of Incorporation  restricts the  ownership  and voting  of the
Company's capital  stock, including  its Common  Stock, in  accordance with  the
Communications  Act and the rules of the FCC, to prohibit ownership of more than
20% of the Company's capital  stock (or control of more  than 20% of the  voting
power  it represents) by or for the  account of aliens or their representatives,
foreign governments  or  their  representatives  or  foreign  corporations.  See
'Business  -- Regulation.' The  Certificate of Incorporation  also prohibits any
transfer of the Company's capital stock that would cause the Company to  violate
this  prohibition. In addition, the  Certificate of Incorporation authorizes the
Board of Directors  to adopt such  provisions as it  deems necessary to  enforce
these  prohibitions. The Company's  Board of Directors has  the right to require
that the certificates evidencing shares of the Company's Common Stock contain  a
certification  that must be  executed by the transferee  of any such certificate
before transfers of the shares represented thereby  may be made on the books  of
the Company. Such certification addresses whether such transferee, any person or
entity  who will be able to vote such  shares, or any person or entity for whose
account such shares  will be held,  is an alien,  foreign government or  foreign
corporation.
 
PREFERRED STOCK
 
     The  Certificate  of Incorporation  authorizes  the Board  of  Directors to
issue, from time  to time and  without further stockholder  action, one or  more
series of Preferred Stock, and to fix the relative rights and preferences of the
shares   thereof,   including  voting   powers,  dividend   rights,  liquidation
preferences, redemption rights and conversion privileges. To date, the Board  of
Directors  has not authorized  any series of  Preferred Stock, and  there are no
agreements or understandings for the issuance of any shares of Preferred  Stock.
Because  of its broad  discretion with respect  to the creation  and issuance of
Preferred Stock  without  stockholder approval,  the  Board of  Directors  could
adversely affect the voting power of the holders of Common Stock and, by issuing
shares  of  Preferred Stock  with certain  voting, conversion  and/or redemption
rights, could discourage any attempt to obtain control of the Company.
 
DELAWARE LAW AND CERTAIN CERTIFICATE OF INCORPORATION AND BY-LAW PROVISIONS
 
     The Company is a Delaware corporation and is subject to Section 203 of  the
Delaware  General  Corporation  law.  Subject to  certain  exceptions  set forth
therein, Section 203 prevents an 'interested stockholder' (defined generally  as
a   person  owning   15%  or   more  of   a  corporation's   outstanding  voting
 
                                       57
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
stock) from engaging in  a 'business combination' (as  defined) with a  Delaware
corporation  for three years following the date such person became an interested
stockholder unless (i) before such person became an interested stockholder,  the
Board  of Directors of the corporation approved the transaction that resulted in
the interested stockholder  becoming an interested  stockholder or approved  the
business combination; (ii) upon consummation of the transaction that resulted in
the  interested stockholder  becoming an interested  stockholder, the interested
stockholder  owned  at  least  85%  of  the  voting  stock  of  the  corporation
outstanding  at the  time the transaction  commenced (excluding  shares owned by
persons who are both officers and directors of the corporation, and shares  held
by  certain employee stock ownership plans);  or (iii) following the transaction
in which such person became an interested stockholder, the business  combination
is  approved by the  Board of Directors  of the corporation  and authorized at a
meeting of  stockholders by  the affirmative  vote of  the holders  of at  least
two-thirds  of the outstanding voting stock of  the corporation not owned by the
interested stockholder. Under certain circumstances, Section 203 of the Delaware
General Corporation Law (the 'DGCL') makes it more difficult for an  'interested
stockholder'  to effect various  business combinations with  a corporation for a
three-year period, although the  stockholders may, by  adopting an amendment  to
the  corporation's  certificate  of incorporation  or  bylaws, elect  not  to be
governed by this section, effective twelve months after adoption. The  Company's
Certificate  of Incorporation  and By-laws do  not exclude the  Company from the
restrictions imposed under Section 203 of  the DGCL. It is anticipated that  the
provisions  of Section  203 of  the DGCL  may encourage  companies interested in
acquiring the Company to negotiate in advance with the Board of Directors.
 
     The Certificate of Incorporation divides the Board of Directors into  three
classes,  with one class having a  term of one year, one  class having a term of
two years and one class  having a term of three  years. Each class is as  nearly
equal in number as possible. The Company's By-laws provide that the exact number
of directors shall be fixed from time to time by the Board of Directors. At each
annual  meeting  of stockholders,  directors will  be  elected to  succeed those
directors whose terms have expired, and  each newly elected director will  serve
for  a three-year term. Directors may only  be removed for cause. The classified
board provision could increase the likelihood  that, in the event of a  takeover
of  the Company, incumbent  directors will retain  their positions. In addition,
the classified board  provision will  help insure  that the  Company's Board  of
Directors,  if confronted with  an unsolicited proposal from  a third party that
has acquired a block of  the voting stock of  the Company, will have  sufficient
time  to review the proposal  and appropriate alternatives and  to seek the best
available result for all stockholders.
 
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY AND INDEMNIFICATION
 
     The Certificate  of  Incorporation  provides that  to  the  fullest  extent
permitted  by the  DGCL, a director  of the Company  shall not be  liable to the
Company or its  stockholders for the  monetary damages for  breach of  fiduciary
duty  as a director. Under the DGCL, liability  of a director may not be limited
(i) for any  breach of  the director's  duty or loyalty  to the  Company or  its
stockholders,  (ii) for  acts or  omissions not  in good  faith or  that involve
intentional misconduct  or a  knowing  violation of  law,  (iii) in  respect  of
certain  unlawful dividend payments or stock redemptions or repurchases and (iv)
for any  transaction  from  which  the director  derives  an  improper  personal
benefit.  The effect of the provision of  the Certificate of Incorporation is to
eliminate the rights of the Company and its stockholders (through  stockholders'
derivative suits on behalf of the Company) to recover monetary damages against a
director  for breach  of the  fiduciary duty  of care  as a  director (including
breaches resulting from negligent or  grossly negligent behavior) except in  the
situations  described in clauses (i) through (iv) above. This provision does not
limit or  eliminate  the  rights of  the  Company  or any  stockholder  to  seek
nonmonetary  relief such as an injunction or rescission in the event of a breach
of a director's duty  of care. In addition,  the Company's By-laws provide  that
the Company shall indemnify its directors, officers, employees and agents to the
fullest extent permitted by the DGCL.
 
     The  Company  maintains  a  standard  policy  of  officers'  and directors'
liability insurance.
 
TRANSFER AGENT AND REGISTRAR
 
   
     First Chicago Trust Company  of New York will  serve as the transfer  agent
and registrar for the Common Stock.
    
 
                                       58
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                        SHARES ELIGIBLE FOR FUTURE SALE
 
   
     Upon  completion of the Offerings, the  Company will have 14,988,232 shares
of  Common   Stock  outstanding   (15,648,232   shares  if   the   Underwriters'
over-allotment  options are exercised  in full). Of  these shares, the 4,400,000
shares sold  in  the Offerings  (5,060,000  shares if  the  Underwriters'  over-
allotment  options  are  exercised in  full)  will be  freely  tradeable without
restriction or further  registration under  the Securities Act,  except for  any
shares  purchased  in connection  with the  Offerings by  an 'affiliate'  of the
Company, as that term is  defined under Rule 144 of  the Securities Act and  the
regulations  promulgated thereunder, which will be subject to the limitations of
Rule 144.
    
 
   
     The remaining 10,588,232 shares will be 'restricted' securities within  the
meaning  of Rule  144 under the  Securities Act and  may not be  sold other than
pursuant to  an effective  registration statement  under the  Securities Act  or
pursuant  to an exemption  from the registration  requirements of the Securities
Act.  All  of  such  10,588,232  shares  are  subject  to  agreements  with  the
Underwriters  that prohibit their sale or other  disposition for a period of 180
days after the date of the Offerings without the prior written consent of Lehman
Brothers Inc.
    
 
     In general, under Rule 144 under the Securities Act as currently in effect,
a person (or persons whose shares must be aggregated) who has beneficially owned
Restricted Shares for at least two years,  including a person who may be  deemed
an 'affiliate' of the Company, is entitled to sell within any three-month period
that  number of shares  that does not exceed  the greater of  one percent of the
then outstanding  shares of  the Common  Stock or  the reported  average  weekly
trading  volume of the then outstanding shares for the four weeks preceding each
such sale. Sales  under Rule  144 also  are subject  to certain  manner of  sale
restrictions  and notice requirements, and to the availability of current public
information  about  the  Company.  Any  person  (or  persons  whose  shares  are
aggregated)  who is not deemed  to have been an affiliate  of the Company at any
time during the 90 days preceding a sale, and who has beneficially owned  shares
for  at  least  three years  (including  any  period of  ownership  of preceding
non-affiliated holders), will be entitled to sell such shares under Rule  144(k)
without  regard to  the volume  limitations, manner  of sale  provisions, public
information requirements  or notice  requirements. As  defined in  Rule 144,  an
'affiliate'  of an issuer is  a person that directly,  or indirectly through the
usage of one or more intermediaries, controls, or is controlled by, or is  under
common control with, such issuer.
 
   
     Prior  to the  Offerings, there  has been no  public market  for the Common
Stock. No prediction can be made as to the effect, if any, that future sales  of
shares,  or the availability of shares for  future sale, will have on the market
price of the Common Stock prevailing from time to time. The Company has  granted
the  Investors a Common Stock shelf registration right which becomes exercisable
one year after the effective date of the Offerings. Sales of substantial amounts
of Common Stock (including shares issued upon the exercise of stock options), or
the perception that such  sales could occur,  could adversely affect  prevailing
market prices for the Common Stock. If such sales reduce the market price of the
Common  Stock, the Company's  ability to raise additional  capital in the equity
markets could be adversely affected.
    
 
                                       59
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      DESCRIPTION OF CERTAIN INDEBTEDNESS
 
CREDIT AGREEMENT
 
     The Company, the First National Bank of Chicago, N.A. ('First Chicago') and
certain other  lenders (collectively,  the 'Lenders')  entered into  the  Credit
Agreement,  pursuant to which  the Lenders have provided  a $60.0 million credit
facility, including revolving loans and up to $5.0 million in letters of credit,
to the  Company. The  following  summary of  certain  provisions of  the  Credit
Agreement  is qualified by reference to the Credit Agreement, a copy of which is
filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement of which this Prospectus is  a
part,  and capitalized terms have the meaning set forth in the Credit Agreement.
The Credit Agreement  is used  to finance  certain capital  expenditures and  to
provide for ongoing working capital requirements of the Company. The Company may
borrow on a revolving basis under the Credit Agreement at any time prior to June
30,  1997. Thereafter, loans under the Credit Agreement convert into term loans,
and must  be repaid  according  to a  specified quarterly  installment  schedule
beginning on September 30, 1997 and continuing until June 30, 2002.
 
     The  Company's  obligations  under  the  Credit  Agreement  are  secured by
substantially all of the Company's assets (other than licenses or permits issued
by the FCC to the extent that it is unlawful to grant a security interest in, or
would cause  a  forfeiture of,  such  licenses  or permits,  but  including  the
proceeds  from any sale or disposition of such licenses or permits to the extent
the grant of a security interest in such proceeds is lawful).
 
     Loans under the Credit Agreement  ('Advances') may be either Floating  Rate
Advances  or  Eurodollar Advances,  as selected  by  the Company.  Floating Rate
Advances bear interest at the Alternate Base Rate plus the Applicable Margin and
Eurodollar Advances bear  interest at  the Eurodollar Rate.  The Alternate  Base
Rate  is defined as the  higher of (i) the corporate  base rate of First Chicago
and (ii)  the weighted  average of  the rates  on overnight  Federal funds  with
members of the Federal Reserve System plus 1/2%. The Eurodollar Rate is equal to
the  sum of (i) the quotient  of (a) the rate determined  by First Chicago to be
the rate at  which deposits  in U.S.  dollars are  offered by  First Chicago  to
first-class  banks in  the London  interbank market  applicable to  such period,
divided by (b) one  minus the applicable  aggregate reserve requirement  imposed
under  Regulation D of the  Board of Governors of  the Federal Reserve System on
Eurocurrency liabilities, plus (ii) the Applicable Margin. The Applicable Margin
is determined by reference to  the Leverage Ratio of  the Company (equal to  (i)
the  total debt of the Company divided by (b) the net operating cash flow of the
Company for the last two fiscal quarters multiplied by two) as set forth in  the
following table:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
          LEVERAGE RATIO
- ----------------------------------              APPLICABLE MARGIN
GREATER THAN                               ---------------------------
OR EQUAL TO          BUT LESS THAN         FLOATING         EURODOLLAR
- ------------         -------------         --------         ----------
<S>                  <C>                   <C>              <C>
     3.5                   --                1.00%             2.25%
     3.0                  3.5                0.75              2.00
     2.5                  3.0                0.50              1.75
     2.0                  2.5                0.25              1.50
      --                  2.0                0.00              1.25
</TABLE>
 
     The  Credit Agreement  provides that  on or  before June  30 of  each year,
commencing with  June 30,  1998, the  Company is  required to  make a  mandatory
prepayment  of all outstanding Advances in an  amount equal to 50% of the excess
of Net  Operating  Cash  Flow  over (i)  capital  expenditures,  (ii)  scheduled
principal payments, (iii) increases or decreases in the excess of current assets
over current liabilities, (iv) tax distributions and (v) interest expense.
 
     The  Credit  Agreement contains  numerous  restrictive financial  and other
covenants, including, but not  limited to (i) limitations  on the incurrence  of
liens  and other indebtedness, (ii)  restrictions on mergers and consolidations,
certain asset sales,  investments exceeding  $10 million  over the  term of  the
Credit  Agreement and sale-leasebacks, (iii) a prohibition (with certain limited
exceptions) on  dividends on  its  capital stock  and  (iv) the  achievement  of
certain  financial targets,  including an interest  coverage ratio  of 3.75:1 in
1996 and 4.0:1 thereafter, a pro forma fixed charge coverage ratio of 1.10:1  in
1997  and 1.15:1 thereafter, a fixed charge coverage ratio of 1.10:1 during 1997
and 1.20:1 thereafter, a leverage
 
                                       60
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
ratio of 4.00:1 through June 30, 1996 declining to 2.50:1 in 1999 and a limit on
capital expenditures of $28.5  million in 1996, decreasing  to $24.0 million  in
2001 and thereafter.
 
     Events  of default  under the Credit  Agreement include,  among others, (i)
nonpayment of  principal, interest,  fees  or other  obligations due  under  the
Credit  Agreement  and  related  documents, (ii)  breach  in  the  observance or
performance of certain covenants, conditions or agreements, (iii) failure by the
Company to pay when due any indebtedness in excess of $500,000, or default under
any agreement relating to indebtedness of the Company aggregating $500,000 which
causes acceleration of the  stated maturity of  such indebtedness, (iv)  certain
bankruptcy  events,  (v) certain  government  condemnations of  property  of the
Company and (vi) failure to pay or otherwise discharge any judgment in excess of
$500,000 for thirty days.
 
     The Company is charged a commitment  fee for the unborrowed portion of  the
funds  which each Lender  is obligated to  loan under the  Credit Agreement at a
rate of  .375% per  annum, which  rate is  reduced to  .50% per  annum when  the
Leverage  Ratio is equal or greater than 2.0.  The Company is also charged a fee
on outstanding undrawn  letters of  credit based on  the Leverage  Ratio as  set
forth in the previous table.
 
                                       61
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
            CERTAIN UNITED STATES FEDERAL INCOME TAX CONSIDERATIONS
                         FOR NON-UNITED STATES HOLDERS
 
     The  following is  a general  discussion of  certain United  States federal
income tax consequences of  the ownership and disposition  of Common Stock by  a
holder  who  is not  a United  States  person (a  'Non-U.S. Holder').  For these
purposes, the term  'United States person'  is defined  as any person  who is  a
citizen  or resident  of the  United States, a  corporation or  a partnership or
other entity created or organized in the United States or under the laws of  the
United  States or of any State, or an estate or trust whose income is includable
in gross income for United States federal income tax purposes regardless of  its
source.  This discussion does  not address all aspects  of United States federal
income and estate taxes and does not  deal with non-United States and state  and
local  tax consequences  that may  be relevant to  Non-U.S. Holders  in light of
their personal circumstances. Furthermore, this  discussion is based on  current
provisions  of  the Internal  Revenue  Code of  1986,  as amended  (the 'Code'),
existing and proposed regulations promulgated thereunder and administrative  and
judicial  interpretations  thereof, all  of which  are  subject to  change. Each
prospective purchaser of Common Stock is  advised to consult a tax advisor  with
respect  to current and  possible future tax  consequences of acquiring, holding
and disposing of Common Stock.
 
     An individual  may,  subject to  certain  exceptions,  be deemed  to  be  a
resident alien (as opposed to a nonresident alien) by virtue of being present in
the  United States on at least 31 days in the calendar year and for an aggregate
of at least 183 days during a  three-year period ending in the current  calendar
year  (counting for such purposes  all of the days  present in the current year,
one-third of the days present in  the immediately preceding year, and  one-sixth
of  the days present in the second  preceding year). Resident aliens are subject
to United  States  federal  tax as  if  they  were United  States  citizens  and
residents.
 
DIVIDENDS
 
     The  Company does not currently intend to pay dividends on shares of Common
Stock. See 'Dividend Policy.' In the event that dividends are paid on shares  of
Common  Stock,  except as  described below,  such dividends  paid to  a Non-U.S.
Holder of Common Stock will generally be subject to withholding of United States
federal income tax at a 30%  rate or such lower rate  as may be specified by  an
applicable  income tax  treaty, unless  the dividends  are effectively connected
with the conduct of a trade or business of the Non-U.S. Holder within the United
States. If the dividend  is effectively connected with  the conduct of a  United
States trade or business of a Non-U.S. Holder who has properly filed a Form 4224
(or  similar statement) with  the withholding agent with  respect to the taxable
year in which  the dividend is  paid, no withholding  is required. However,  the
dividend  (as adjusted by any applicable deductions) would be subject to regular
United States federal  income tax. In  addition, all  or a portion  of any  such
effectively  connected dividends  received by  a foreign  corporation may, under
certain circumstances, be subject to an additional 'branch profits tax' at a 30%
rate or such lower rate as may be specified by an applicable income tax treaty.
 
     Under current  United States  Treasury regulations,  dividends paid  to  an
address  outside  the  United States,  unless  the  payer has  knowledge  to the
contrary, are presumed to be paid to a resident of such country for purposes  of
the withholding discussed above, and, under the current interpretation of United
States  Treasury regulations, for purposes of determining the applicability of a
tax treaty rate. Under proposed United States Treasury regulations not currently
in effect, however, a Non-U.S.  Holder of Common Stock  who wishes to claim  the
benefit  of an  applicable treaty rate  would be required  to satisfy applicable
certification and other  requirements. Currently,  certification and  disclosure
requirements  must be complied with in order to be exempt from withholding under
the effectively connected income exemption discussed above.
 
     A Non-U.S. Holder  of Common Stock  eligible for a  reduced rate of  United
States  withholding tax  pursuant to  a tax  treaty may  obtain a  refund of any
excess amounts currently withheld by filing an appropriate claim for refund with
the Internal Revenue Service. Each Non-U.S. Holder should consult a tax  advisor
on the possibility of entitlement to a foreign tax credit or other tax relief in
the Non-U.S. Holder's own country with respect to any United States tax paid.
 
GAIN ON DISPOSITION OF COMMON STOCK
 
     A  Non-U.S. Holder will  generally not be subject  to United States federal
income tax  (and  no  tax will  generally  be  withheld) with  respect  to  gain
recognized on a sale or other disposition of Common
 
                                       62
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
Stock  so long  as (i)  the gain is  not effectively  connected with  a trade or
business of  the Non-U.S.  Holder in  the United  States, (ii)  in the  case  of
certain  Non-U.S. Holders  who are non-resident  alien individuals  and hold the
Common Stock as  a capital asset,  such holders  are not present  in the  United
States  for  183  or  more  days  in the  taxable  year  of  the  sale  or other
disposition, and (iii) the Company is not and has not been a 'United States real
property holding  corporation' for  United States  federal income  tax  purposes
(assuming  the Common  Stock is  regularly traded  on an  established securities
market). The Company believes that it is not, and does not anticipate  becoming,
a  'United States real  property holding corporation'  for United States federal
income tax purposes.  In addition, the  Company believes that  the Common  Stock
will be treated as regularly traded on an established securities market.
 
     If  the capital gain from the sale  or other disposition of Common Stock is
effectively connected with the  conduct of a trade  or business of the  Non-U.S.
Holder  within the United States, or if  the United States real property holding
corporation provisions apply and the Non-U.S. Holder is more than a five percent
stockholder (applying  certain attribution  rules), the  capital gain  would  be
subject  to regular United States federal  income tax. In addition, with respect
to corporate Non-U.S. Holders, the 'branch profits tax' described above may also
apply. An individual Non-U.S. Holder who is present in the United States for 183
days or more  in the taxable  year of sale  on other disposition  and holds  the
Common  Stock as a capital asset will generally be taxed at a rate of 30% on any
net capital gain recognized  during any year  on such stock  if either (i)  such
individual  has a 'tax  home' (as defined  for United States  federal income tax
purposes) in the United States or (ii) the gain is attributable to an office  or
other  fixed  place of  business  maintained by  such  individual in  the United
States. Non-U.S. Holders should consult  applicable treaties, which may  provide
for different rules.
 
FEDERAL ESTATE TAXES
 
     Common Stock held (or treated as owned) by an individual Non-U.S. Holder at
the  time of  death will be  included in  such holder's gross  estate for United
States federal estate tax purposes and  may be subject to United States  federal
estate tax, unless an applicable estate tax treaty provides otherwise.
 
UNITED STATES INFORMATION REPORTING REQUIREMENTS AND BACKUP WITHHOLDING TAX
 
     The Company must report annually to the IRS and to each Non-U.S. Holder the
amount  of dividends paid to, and the tax withheld with respect to, such holder.
These information reporting requirements apply regardless of whether withholding
was reduced  or  eliminated  by  an  applicable  tax  treaty.  Copies  of  these
information  returns  may  also be  made  available  under the  provisions  of a
specific treaty or agreement to  the tax authority in  the country in which  the
Non-U.S. Holder resides.
 
     Under  temporary United  States Treasury regulations,  United States backup
withholding tax (which generally is a withholding tax imposed at the rate of 31%
on certain payments to  persons that fail to  furnish certain information  under
the  United States information reporting requirements) and information reporting
with respect to such tax  will generally not apply  to dividends paid on  Common
Stock  to a Non-U.S. Holder  at an address outside  the United States unless the
Payer has knowledge that the payee is a U.S. person.
 
     As a general matter, backup withholding and information reporting also will
not apply to a payment of the proceeds of a sale of Common Stock by or through a
foreign office of a foreign broker. Information reporting requirements (but  not
backup  withholding) will apply, however, to a payment of the proceeds of a sale
of Common Stock by a foreign office of a broker that is a United States  person,
that  derives  50% or  more of  its gross  income for  certain periods  from the
conduct of a trade or  business in the United States,  or that is a  'controlled
foreign  corporation'  (generally, a  foreign  corporation controlled  by United
States shareholders) with respect  to the United States,  unless the broker  has
documentary  evidence in its  records that the  holder is a  Non-U.S. Holder and
certain other  conditions  are  met,  or the  holder  otherwise  establishes  an
exemption.  Payment by a United  States office of a broker  of the proceeds of a
sale of  Common Stock  is subject  to both  backup withholding  and  information
reporting  unless the holder certifies  under penalties of perjury  that it is a
Non-U.S. Holder, or otherwise establishes an exemption.
 
     A Non-U.S. Holder  may obtain a  refund of any  amounts withheld under  the
backup  withholding rules  by filing the  appropriate claim for  refund with the
IRS.
 
     These backup withholding and information  reporting rules are under  review
by  the United States Treasury, and their  application to the Common Stock could
be changed prospectively by future regulations.
 
                                       63
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                  UNDERWRITING
 
     The underwriters  of the  U.S.  Offering of  the  Common Stock  (the  'U.S.
Underwriters'),  for  whom Lehman  Brothers Inc.,  Smith Barney,  Inc., Wessels,
Arnold & Henderson,  L.L.C. and  Brenner Securities Corporation  are serving  as
representatives,  have severally agreed, subject to  the terms and conditions of
the U.S. Underwriting Agreement, the form of which is filed as an exhibit to the
Registration Statement, to purchase from the Company, and the Company has agreed
to sell to each U.S. Underwriter, the aggregate number of shares of Common Stock
set forth opposite their names below.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                    NUMBER OF
                                U.S. UNDERWRITER                                     SHARES
- ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------   ---------
 
<S>                                                                                 <C>
Lehman Brothers Inc..............................................................
Smith Barney Inc.................................................................
Wessels, Arnold & Henderson, L.L.C...............................................
Brenner Securities Corporation...................................................
 
                                                                                    ---------
          Total..................................................................   3,520,000
                                                                                    ---------
                                                                                    ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
     The managers of the International Offering named below (the  'International
Managers'),  for whom Lehman Brothers International (Europe), Smith Barney Inc.,
Wessels, Arnold  &  Henderson, L.L.C.  and  Brenner Securities  Corporation  are
acting  as  lead  managers, have  severally  agreed,  subject to  the  terms and
conditions of the  International Underwriting  Agreement, the form  of which  is
filed as an exhibit to the Registration Statement, to purchase from the Company,
and  the Company has agreed to sell to each International Manager, the aggregate
number of  shares of  Common Stock  set forth  opposite their  respective  names
below.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                     NUMBER OF
                              INTERNATIONAL MANAGERS                                  SHARES
- ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------   ---------
<S>                                                                                  <C>
Lehman Brothers International (Europe)............................................
Smith Barney Inc..................................................................
Wessels, Arnold & Henderson, L.L.C................................................
Brenner Securities Corporation....................................................
                                                                                     ---------
          Total...................................................................    880,000
                                                                                     ---------
                                                                                     ---------
</TABLE>
    
 
     The   U.S.  Underwriting  Agreement   and  the  International  Underwriting
Agreement  (collectively,  the  'Underwriting  Agreements')  provided  that  the
obligations   of  the   U.S.  Underwriters   and  the   International  Managers,
respectively, to purchase shares of Common Stock, are subject to the approval of
certain legal matters by counsel and to certain other conditions and that if any
of the shares of Common Stock are purchased by the U.S. Underwriters pursuant to
the U.S. Underwriting Agreement or by the International Managers pursuant to the
International Underwriting Agreement, all the  shares of Common Stock agreed  to
be  purchased by either the U.S.  Underwriters or the International Managers, as
the case may be, pursuant to  their respective Underwriting Agreements, must  be
so
 
                                       64
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
purchased. The offering price and underwriting discounts and commissions for the
U.S.  Offering and the International Offering  are identical. The closing of the
International Offering is a  condition to the closing  of the U.S. Offering  and
the  closing  of  the  U.S.  Offering  is a  condition  to  the  closing  of the
International Offering.
 
     The  Company  has  been  advised   that  the  U.S.  Underwriters  and   the
International  Managers propose to offer shares  of Common Stock directly to the
public initially at the  public offering price  set forth on  the cover page  of
this  Prospectus  and to  certain  selected dealers  (who  may include  the U.S.
Underwriters and International Managers)  at such public  offering price less  a
selling  concession not to exceed  $        per  share. The selected dealers may
reallow a concession not to exceed $       per share. After the initial offering
of the Common Stock, the concession  to selected dealers and the reallowance  to
other  dealers may  be changed  by the  U.S. Underwriters  and the International
Managers.
 
     The U.S. Underwriters and the  International Managers have entered into  an
Agreement  Among U.S.  Underwriters and  International Managers  (the 'Agreement
Among') pursuant to which each U.S. Underwriter has agreed that, as part of  the
distribution  of the shares of Common Stock offered in the U.S. Offering, (a) it
is not purchasing any of such shares for the account of anyone other than a U.S.
or Canadian Person (as defined  below) and (b) it has  not offered or sold,  and
will  not offer, sell,  resell or deliver,  directly or indirectly,  any of such
shares or distribute any  prospectus relating to the  U.S. Offering outside  the
United  States or Canada or  to anyone other than a  U.S. or Canadian Person. In
addition, pursuant to the Agreement Among, each International Manager has agreed
that, as part of the distribution of  the shares of Common Stock offered in  the
International  Offering, (a)  it is  not purchasing any  of such  shares for the
account of any U.S. or Canadian Person and  (b) it has not offered to sold,  and
will  not offer, sell,  resell or deliver,  directly or indirectly,  any of such
shares or  distribute  any prospectus  relating  to the  International  Offering
within  the  United States  or Canada  or to  any U.S.  or Canadian  Person. The
foregoing limitations do not apply  to stabilization transactions or to  certain
other  transactions specified in  the Underwriting Agreements  and the Agreement
Among, including: (i) certain purchases and sales between the U.S.  Underwriters
and  the International Managers; (ii) certain offers, sales, resales, deliveries
or distributions to or through  investment advisors or other persons  exercising
investment  discretion; (iii) purchases,  offers or sales  by a U.S. Underwriter
who is also acting  as an International Manager  or by an International  Manager
who   also  is  acting  as  a  U.S.  Underwriter  and  (iv)  other  transactions
specifically approved by  the U.S. Underwriters  and International Managers.  As
used  herein, 'U.S.  or Canadian  Person' means any  resident or  citizen of the
United States or Canada, any corporation, pension, profit sharing or other trust
or other entity organized under or governed by the laws of the United States  or
Canada  or any political  subdivision thereof (other than  the foreign branch of
any United States or Canadian Person), any  estate or trust the income of  which
is  subject to United  States or Canadian federal  income taxation regardless of
the source of its income, and any  United States or Canadian branch of a  person
other  than a United States  or Canadian Person. The  term 'United States' means
the United States of America (including, the states thereof and the District  of
Columbia)  and its territories,  its possessions and other  areas subject to its
jurisdiction. The term 'Canada' means the provinces of Canada, its  territories,
its possessions and other areas subject to its jurisdiction.
 
     Pursuant  to  the  Agreement  Among,  sales  may  be  made  among  the U.S.
Underwriters and the International Managers of  such number of shares of  Common
Stock  as may be mutually agreed.  The price of any shares  so sold shall be the
public offering price as then in effect for Common Stock being sold by the  U.S.
Underwriters  and International  Managers, less an  amount not  greater than the
selling concession  unless  otherwise determined  by  mutual agreement.  To  the
extent  that there  are sales  pursuant to  the Agreement  Among, the  number of
shares  initially  available  for  sale   by  the  U.S.  Underwriters  and   the
International  Managers may  be more  or less than  the amount  specified on the
cover page of this Prospectus.
 
     Each International Manager has represented and agreed that: (i) it has  not
offered or sold and, prior to the date six months after the date of issue of the
shares  of Common Stock,  will not offer or  sell any shares  of Common Stock to
persons in  the  United Kingdom  except  to persons  whose  ordinary  activities
involve  them in  acquiring, holding, managing  or disposing  of investments (as
principal  or  agent)  for  the  purpose  of  their  business  or  otherwise  in
circumstances which have not resulted and will
 
                                       65
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
not result in an offer to the public in the United Kingdom within the meaning of
the  Public Offers of Securities Regulations 1995; (ii) it has complied and will
comply with all applicable  provisions of the Financial  Services Act 1986  with
respect  to anything  done by  it in relation  to the  Common Stock  in, from or
otherwise involving the United Kingdom; and  (iii) it has only issued or  passed
on,  and will only  issue or pass on,  to any person in  the United Kingdom, any
document received by it in connection with the issue of the Common Stock if that
person is of a  kind described in  Article 11(3) of  the Financial Services  Act
1986 (Investment Advertisements) (Exemptions) Order 1995.
 
     Purchasers  of the shares pursuant to the  Offerings may be required to pay
stamp taxes and other charges in accordance  with the laws and practices of  the
country  of purchase in  addition to the  offering price set  forth on the cover
page hereof.
 
     The Company, the management and directors of the Company and certain  other
stockholders  of the Company  have each agreed  not to offer,  sell or otherwise
dispose of any shares of Common Stock for a period of 180 days after the date of
this Prospectus  without the  prior  written consent  of Lehman  Brothers  Inc.,
subject  in the  case of the  Company to  exceptions to permit  the issuances of
shares in  connection  with  the  Offerings and  upon  exercise  of  outstanding
options. See 'Shares Eligible for Future Sales.'
 
     The  U.S. Underwriters have  reserved approximately           shares of the
Common Stock  for sale,  at the  initial public  offering price,  to  directors,
officers  and employees  of the Company,  their business  affiliates and related
parties, in each case as such  persons have expressed an interest in  purchasing
such  shares of the Common  Stock in the Offerings. The  number of shares of the
Common Stock available for  sale to the  general public will  be reduced to  the
extent  such  persons purchase  such reserved  shares of  the Common  Stock. Any
reserved shares of  the Common Stock  not so  purchased will be  offered by  the
Underwriters  to the general public on the same basis as the other shares of the
Common Stock offered pursuant to the U.S. Offering.
 
   
     The Company  has granted  to the  U.S. Underwriters  and the  International
Managers  options to purchase up to an  additional 528,000 and 132,000 shares of
Common Stock,  respectively,  at the  initial  public offering  price  less  the
underwriting  discounts  and  commissions  shown  on  the  cover  page  of  this
Prospectus, solely  to  cover  over-allotments,  if  any.  The  options  may  be
exercised  at any time up to  30 days after the date  of this Prospectus. To the
extent that the U.S. Underwriters  and the International Managers exercise  such
options,  each of the  U.S. Underwriters and the  International Managers, as the
case may be,  will be committed  (subject to certain  conditions) to purchase  a
number   of  option   shares  proportionate   to  such   U.S.  Underwriter's  or
International Manager's initial commitment.
    
 
     The  Company  has  agreed  to  indemnify  the  U.S.  Underwriters  and  the
International  Managers against certain liabilities, including liabilities under
the Securities Act, and  to contribute to payments  which the U.S.  Underwriters
and the International Managers may be required to make in respect thereof.
 
   
     The  Common  Stock has  been approved  for listing  on the  Nasdaq National
Market, subject to official notice of issuance, under the symbol 'BEEP'.
    
 
     Prior to the Offerings  there has been no  public market for the  Company's
Common  Stock. The  initial public offering  price for the  Common Stock offered
hereby was determined by  negotiation among the  Company, the U.S.  Underwriters
and the International Managers. Among the principal factors considered in making
such  determination was  the history  of and the  prospects for  the industry in
which the Company competes, an assessment of the Company's management, the  past
and  present operations of the Company,  the historical results of operations of
the Company and the trend of its revenues and earnings, the prospects for future
earnings of the Company, the general condition of the securities markets at  the
time  of  the  Offerings  and  the prices  of  similar  securities  of generally
comparable companies. There can  be no assurance that  an active trading  market
will  develop for the  Common Stock or that  the Common Stock  will trade in the
public market  subsequent  to the  Offerings  at  or above  the  initial  public
offering  price. See 'Risk Factors -- Absence of Public Market and Determination
of Public Offering Price.'
 
   
     The Underwriters do not intend to confirm sales of the Common Stock offered
hereby to any accounts over which they exercise discretionary authority.
    
 
                                       66
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                 LEGAL MATTERS
 
   
     The validity of the  Common Stock will  be passed upon  for the Company  by
Latham  & Watkins,  New York,  New York and  certain regulatory  matters will be
passed upon for the  Company by Richard S.  Becker & Associates, Chartered.  Mr.
Roger  H. Kimmel, a member of the firm of Latham & Watkins, is a director of the
Company. Certain legal matters relating to the Offerings will be passed upon for
the Underwriters by  Simpson Thacher  & Bartlett (a  partnership which  includes
professional  corporations), New York,  New York and  certain regulatory matters
will be passed upon for the Underwriters by Dow, Lohnes & Albertson.
    
 
                                    EXPERTS
 
     The financial statements  as of December  31, 1993, December  31, 1994  and
December  31, 1995 and for each of the  three years in the period ended December
31, 1995 in  this Prospectus and  elsewhere in the  registration statement  have
been  audited  by  Arthur  Andersen  LLP,  independent  public  accountants,  as
indicated in their  reports with  respect thereto,  and are  included herein  in
reliance upon the authority of said firm as experts in giving said reports.
 
                             ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
 
   
     The  Company has filed with the Commission a Registration Statement on Form
S-1  (together  with  all  amendments,  exhibits  and  schedules  thereto,   the
'Registration  Statement') under the  Securities Act with  respect to the Common
Stock being  offered hereby.  This  Prospectus, which  constitutes part  of  the
Registration Statement, does not contain all of the information set forth in the
Registration  Statement.  Statements  made  in  this  Prospectus  concerning the
contents of any contract, agreement or other document referred to herein are not
necessarily complete. With  respect to  each such contract,  agreement or  other
document  filed with the Commission as an exhibit to the Registration Statement,
reference is hereby made to such exhibits for a more complete description of the
matter involved,  and each  such  statement shall  be  deemed qualified  in  its
entirety  by such reference. Upon completion  of the Offerings, the Company will
be subject  to  the  informational  reporting  requirements  of  the  Securities
Exchange  Act  of 1934,  as  amended, and,  in  accordance therewith,  will file
reports, proxy  statements  and  other  information  with  the  Commission.  The
Registration  Statement and the exhibits and  schedules thereto, as well as such
reports, proxy statements and other information  may be inspected at the  public
reference  room maintained  by the  Commission at  Room 1024,  450 Fifth Street,
N.W., Washington,  D.C.  20549, should  also  be available  for  inspection  and
copying  at its regional offices located at Northwestern Atrium Center, 500 West
Madison Street, Suite 1400,  Chicago, Illinois 60661 and  7 World Trade  Center,
13th  Floor, New York, New  York 10048 and may  be obtained via the Commission's
internet address at http://www.sec.gov. Copies of such material can be  obtained
from  the public reference section of the  Commission at 450 Fifth Street, N.W.,
Washington, D.C. 20549, at prescribed rates. The Company intends to furnish  its
stockholders  with annual reports containing  financial statements audited by an
independent certified public  accounting firm and  quarterly reports  containing
unaudited  financial information  for the  first three  quarters of  each fiscal
year.
    
 
                                       67




<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
                                    GLOSSARY
    
 
   
     Advances:  Loans under the Credit Agreement  which are either Floating Rate
Advances or Eurodollar Advances, as selected by the Company.
    
 
   
     ARPU: Average monthly  revenue per unit,  calculated by dividing  services,
rent  and maintenance revenues for the period by the applicable number of months
in the period and dividing the result by the average number of units in  service
for the period.
    
 
   
     BEEP:  Symbol under which the Company has  applied to list the Common Stock
on the Nasdaq National Market.
    
 
   
     Board: The Board of Directors of TSR Paging Inc.
    
 
   
     Budget Act: Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993.
    
 
   
     C.D.: Certificate of Deposit.
    
 
   
     Certificate of  Incorporation:  The  certificate of  incorporation  of  TSR
Paging Inc.
    
 
   
     CMRS:  Commercial Mobile Radio Services.  A new regulatory category created
by the Omnibus Budget Reconciliation Act of 1993 which includes those  carriers,
including  TSR  Paging Inc.,  who  make service  available  to the  public  on a
for-profit basis  through interconnection  with  the public  switched  telephone
network.  Most  paging  providers  currently operating  as  either  radio common
carriers or private carrier paging operators are classified as CMRS licensees.
    
 
   
     Committee: Compensation Committee of the Board of Directors of the  Company
that administers the Employee Option Plan.
    
 
   
     Credit  Agreement: The Amended and  Restated Credit Agreement, dated August
31, 1995,  among the  Company, the  First  National Bank  of Chicago,  N.A.  and
certain other lenders party thereto.
    
 
   
     COAM:  Customer owned and maintained pagers. A COAM customer is responsible
for the purchase and maintenance of the unit.
    
 
   
     Code: Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
    
 
   
     Common Stock: The Company's common stock, par value $.01 per share.
    
 
   
     Company: TSR Paging Inc.
    
 
   
     DGCL: Delaware General Corporation Law.
    
 
   
     Director Plan:  The 1996  Non-Employee  Director Stock  Option Plan  to  be
adopted  in connection  with the Offerings.  The Director Plan  will provide for
automatic grants of non-qualified stock options covering authorized but unissued
or reacquired shares of  Common Stock, subject to  adjustment to reflect  events
such   as  stock   dividends,  stock   splits,  recapitalizations,   mergers  or
reorganizations of or by the Company. The Director Plan will be administered  by
the  Board  of  Directors  of  the  Company  and  is  intended  to  satisfy  the
requirements of Rule 16b-3 under the Exchange Act.
    
 
   
     DiSavino Trust: Trust for the benefit of Leonard DiSavino's children  which
holds shares of TSR Paging Inc. Common Stock.
    
 
   
     Dividend:  A $35 million dividend to be paid by the Company to the Founding
Stockholders out of  the proceeds of  the Offering. Messrs.  DiSavino and  Sacks
will use this dividend to repay in part the Notes.
    
 
   
     EBITDA:  Operating income  plus depreciation and  amortization and non-cash
compensation expense.
    
 
   
     Employee Option Plan: The TSR Paging  Inc. Employee Option Plan adopted  by
the Company in June 1996, which permits the grant of non-qualified stock options
and  incentive stock options to purchase shares of Common Stock covering 661,764
authorized but  unissued  or  reacquired  shares of  Common  Stock,  subject  to
adjustment   to  reflect   events  such   as  stock   dividends,  stock  splits,
recapitalizations, mergers or reorganizations of or by the Company.
    
 
   
     EXPU: Average monthly  operating expense per  unit, calculated by  dividing
total  operating  expenses  before depreciation  and  amortization  and non-cash
compensation expense for the  period by the applicable  number of months in  the
period and dividing the result by the average number of units in service for the
period.
    
 
   
     FCC: Federal Communications Commission.
    
 
   
     FCC Rules: The rules, regulations and policies promulgated by the FCC.
    
 
   
     First Chicago: First National Bank of Chicago.
    
 
                                       68
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
     First  R&O:  May 1996  First Report  and  Order pursuant  to which  the FCC
adopted Interim Rules, which included a modification of the Freeze to allow some
flexibility to file paging applications  that extend the composite  interference
contours of existing paging systems.
    
 
   
     FLEX'TM'   technology:  Motorola's   trademark   technology   utilized   by
substantially all  of  TSR  Paging Inc.'s  wireless  messaging  systems.  FLEXTM
technology  enables TSR  Paging Inc.  to more  efficiently use  its bandwidth by
increasing the number of messages transmitted per minute and thereby  increasing
the number of pagers in service which can be supported on its systems.
    
 
   
     Founding  Stockholders: Leonard DiSavino, Philip  Sacks, the DiSavino Trust
and the Mitchell Sacks Trust.
    
 
   
     Glenayre: Glenayre Electronics, Inc. The company from which TSR Paging Inc.
purchases substantially all of its  computerized messaging switches and some  of
its  transmitters.  Glenayre is  a  leading manufacturer  of  wireless messaging
equipment.
    
 
   
     GRAT: Grantor retained annuity trust.
    
 
   
     Internal Revenue Code: Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended.
    
 
   
     Investment Agreement: The Investment Agreement, dated as of July 17,  1995,
among  the Company, related S Corporations,  the partnership, the DiSavino Trust
and the Mitchell Sacks Trust which was  entered into in connection with the  SPA
and  which, among other things, provides the Investors with certain registration
rights in respect of public offerings of Common Stock of the Company.
    
 
   
     Investors: A group of  investors led by TA  Associates, Inc. who  purchased
from  Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks in July 1995 (i) discount notes for $34 million
with  an  aggregate  face  value  of  $70.0  million,  which  are   non-recourse
obligations  of Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks and  (ii) an option for $1 million to
purchase 40.66%  of the  fully-diluted  common stock  of  the Company  from  the
Founding Stockholders in exchange for the discounted portion of the Notes.
    
 
   
     Lenders: First Chicago and other lenders party to the Credit Agreement.
    
 
   
     Merger:  Merger in September 1995 of the S Corporations and the partnership
with and into the Company, with the Company as the surviving S Corporation.
    
 
   
     Mitchell Sacks Trust: Trust for the  benefit of Mitchell Sacks which  holds
shares of TSR Paging Inc. Common Stock.
    
 
   
     Motorola:  Motorola,  Inc. Company  from  which TSR  Paging  Inc. currently
obtains substantially all of its pagers and some of its transmitters.
    
 
   
     MTA: Major Trading Area.  The geographic area  throughout which a  licensee
could operate on a single CMRS paging frequency.
    
 
   
     Mutually  exclusive or  'MX ' applications:  When more than  one entity has
filed a timely application for the same license.
    
 
   
     Named Executive  Officers:  Leonard DiSavino  (Co-Chairman,  President  and
Chief Executive Officer), Philip Sacks (Co-Chairman and Chief Operating Officer)
and  Mitchell  Sacks (Executive  Vice President  Operations and  Chief Financial
Officer).
    
 
   
     Non-U.S. Holder: Holder of TSR Paging Inc. Common Stock who is not a United
States person.
    
 
   
     Notes: Discount  notes with  a face  value of  $70.0 million  that are  the
non-recourse obligations of Messrs. DiSavino and Sacks and were purchased by the
Investors for $34 million in July 1995.
    
 
   
     NPRM:  Notice of Proposed Rulemaking. Adopted  by the FCC in February 1996,
in which the FCC proposed to utilize a geographic licensing process in place  of
the  current site-specific licensing process and  to sell geographic licenses at
auction.
    
 
   
     Opinion 25: APB Opinion No. 12, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees,'
that prescribes an intrinsic value based  method of accounting for companies  to
utilize to measure compensation cost for employee stock based compensation.
    
 
   
     Option: The option of the Investors to purchase 40.66% of the fully-diluted
common  stock of the Company from the  Founding Stockholders in exchange for the
discounted portion of the Notes.
    
 
   
     Options: Non-qualified stock options automatically granted by the  Director
Plan  covering authorized  but unissued  or reacquired  shares of  Common Stock,
subject to adjustment to reflect events  such as stock dividends, stock  splits,
recapitalizations, mergers or reorganizations of or by the Company.
    
 
                                       69
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
     PCPs:  Private  carrier paging  operators. Included  in the  new regulatory
category, commercial  mobile  radio  services, created  by  the  Omnibus  Budget
Reconciliation Act of 1993.
    
 
   
     PCS:  Wireless personal  communication services.  Radio communications that
encompass mobile  and ancillary  fixed communication  that provide  services  to
individuals  and businesses  and can be  integrated with a  variety of competing
networks.
    
 
   
     Phantom Stock Plan or 'Plan': Plan adopted by the Company in September 1995
for Employees  of  TSR  Paging  Inc.  which provides  for  the  grant  of  units
representing interests in the Company.
    
 
   
     PMRS: Private Mobile Radio Service. One of the two new classifications (the
other  of which is CMRS)  created by the FCC rules  adopted in 1995 for wireless
licensees. PMRS is  neither a CMRS  nor the functional  equivalent of a  service
that  meets  the  definition  of  CMRS.  The  Company's  Private  Mobile systems
operating on 929-930  MHz are  subject to  a transition  period through  August,
1996, during which time these systems will be regulated as PMRS systems.
    
 
   
     PN:  Public  Notice  pursuant  to which  the  FCC  listed  those nationwide
exclusive paging channels  that have  been found  to be  exempt from  geographic
licensing, the Interim Rules and the modified Freeze because they are nationwide
exclusive  CMRS paging frequencies  pursuant to the  definition specified in the
NPRM.
    
 
   
     Private Carrier Paging  or 'PCP'  systems: The 929-930  MHz paging  systems
authorized pursuant to Part 90 of the FCC's Rules.
    
 
   
     Private  Mobile frequencies: Frequencies  allocated pursuant to  Part 90 of
the FCC's Rules.
    
 
   
     RCCs: Radio  common  carriers.  A telecommunications  common  carrier  that
provides  radio communications  services but is  not engaged in  the business of
providing landline local exchange telephone service.
    
 
   
     SFAS 109: Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 109,  'Accounting
for Income Taxes.'
    
 
   
     SFAS  121: Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 121, 'Accounting
for the Impairment of Long-Lived Assets.' SFAS 121 requires, among other things,
that an entity review its long-lived assets and certain related intangibles  for
impairment  whenever changes in circumstances  indicate that the carrying amount
of an asset may not be fully recoverable.
    
 
   
     SFAS 123: Statement of Financial Accounting Standards No. 123,  'Accounting
for Stock-Based Compensation.' A new standard issued by the Financial Accounting
Standards  Board that requires,  commencing in 1996, that  an entity account for
employee stock compensation under a fair  value based method. However, SFAS  123
also  allows an  entity to  continue to  measure compensation  cost for employee
stock-based compensation using  the intrinsic value  based method prescribed  by
APB Opinion No. 12, 'Accounting for Stock Issued to Employees.'
    
 
   
     SMR:  Specialized Mobile Radio  services. Radio service  in which licensees
provide land mobile communications services (other than radiolocation  services)
in  the 800 MHz  and 900 MHz bands  on a commercial  basis to federal government
entities, certain individuals and entities eligible to be licensed under part 90
of the FCC's rules.
    
 
   
     SPA: Securities Purchase Agreement,  dated as of July  17, 1995, among  the
Company,  the related  S Corporations, the  partnership and  the Investors which
provides, among other things,  for the purchase  and sale of  the Notes and  the
Option.
    
 
   
     System  Licenses: Series  of licenses granted  by the FCC  on the frequency
929.21.5 MHz throughout the country.
    
 
   
     Tax Agreement:  Tax indemnification  agreement to  be entered  into by  the
Company and the Founding Stockholders in connection with the Offerings.
    
 
   
     Units: The units granted pursuant to the Phantom Stock Plan to employees of
the Company.
    
 
                                       70




<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                         INDEX TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                              PAGE
                                                                                                              ----
<S>                                                                                                           <C>
Report of Independent Public Accountants...................................................................   F-2
Balance Sheets as of December 31, 1994 and 1995 and March 31, 1996.........................................   F-3
Statements of Operations for the years ended December 31, 1993, December 31, 1994 and December 31, 1995 and
  the three months ended March 31, 1995 and March 31, 1996.................................................   F-4
Statements of Stockholders' Equity (Deficit) for the years ended December 31, 1993, December 31, 1994 and
  December 31, 1995 and the three months ended March 31, 1996..............................................   F-5
Statements of Cash Flows for the years ended December 31, 1993, December 31, 1994 and December 31, 1995 and
  the three months ended March 31, 1995 and March 31, 1996.................................................   F-6
Notes to Financial Statements..............................................................................   F-7
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-1
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
    
   
The  financial statements included  herein have been adjusted  to give effect to
the exchange of shares  previously outstanding and  the anticipated increase  in
the  authorized common  stock of  the Company to  20,000,000 shares  of $.01 par
value common  stock  and  the  filing of  the  Company's  amended  and  restated
certificate of incorporation as described in Note 5 to the financial statements.
We  expect to  be in a  position to render  the following audit  report upon the
effectiveness of such events assuming that  from March 1, 1996 to the  effective
date  of such events, no  other events will have  occurred that would affect the
financial statements or the notes thereto.
    
 
   
                                          ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
    
 
   
Roseland, New Jersey
March 1, 1996
    
 
   
                    REPORT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS
    
 
   
To TSR PAGING INC.:
    
 
   
We have audited the accompanying balance  sheets of TSR Paging Inc. (a  Delaware
corporation)  (the 'Company') as of December 31,  1994 and 1995, and the related
statements of operations, stockholders' equity (deficit) and cash flows for  the
three  years in the  period ended December 31,  1995. These financial statements
are the responsibility  of the  Company's management. Our  responsibility is  to
express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits.
    
 
   
We   conducted  our  audits  in  accordance  with  generally  accepted  auditing
standards. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to  obtain
reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material
misstatement.  An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting
the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements. An audit also  includes
assessing  the  accounting principles  used  and significant  estimates  made by
management, as well as evaluating the overall financial statement  presentation.
We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.
    
 
   
In  our opinion, the  financial statements referred to  above present fairly, in
all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of December  31,
1994  and 1995,  and the results  of its operations  and its cash  flows for the
three years in the period ended  December 31, 1995 in conformity with  generally
accepted accounting principles.
    
 
                                      F-2
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                                 BALANCE SHEETS
 
                                     ASSETS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                             DECEMBER 31,             MARCH 31,
                                                                      ---------------------------    -----------
                                                                         1994            1995           1996
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
                                                                                                     (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                                   <C>            <C>             <C>
CURRENT ASSETS:
  Cash.............................................................   $   921,600    $    140,384    $   116,325
  Accounts receivable, less allowance for doubtful accounts of
     $148,735, $203,397 and $448,127 at December 31, 1994 and 1995
     and March 31, 1996, respectively..............................     1,268,546       2,009,618      2,262,249
  Inventory........................................................     3,281,741       6,361,603      8,677,113
  Prepaid expenses and other current assets........................        87,533         379,583        565,892
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
          Total current assets.....................................     5,559,420       8,891,188     11,621,579
EQUIPMENT AND LEASEHOLD IMPROVEMENTS, net (Note 2).................    14,820,532      24,593,192     28,952,896
INTANGIBLE AND OTHER ASSETS (less accumulated amortization of
  $59,747, $82,694 and $125,796 at December 31, 1994 and 1995 and
  March 31, 1996, respectively) (Note 2)...........................       530,404       1,703,721      1,882,020
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
          Total assets.............................................   $20,910,356    $ 35,188,101    $42,456,495
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
 
                                 LIABILITIES AND STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
 
CURRENT LIABILITIES:
  Current maturities of long-term debt (Note 3)....................   $     3,810    $          0    $         0
  Accounts payable.................................................     5,369,317      10,415,359      7,915,125
  Accrued expenses.................................................     1,441,586         924,340        682,359
  Deferred revenues................................................       605,685       1,309,710      1,664,692
  Subscriber deposits..............................................       253,265         268,898        268,601
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
          Total current liabilities................................     7,673,663      12,918,307     10,530,777
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
LONG-TERM DEBT, less current maturities (Note 3)...................    19,650,000      34,000,000     43,750,000
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES (Note 8).............................
STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT) (Notes 2 and 5):
  Preferred stock, par value $.01 per share, 20,000,000 shares
     authorized, none issued and outstanding.......................             0               0              0
  Common stock, par value $.01 per share,             shares
     authorized, 10,588,232 issued and outstanding at December 31,
     1994 and 1995 and March 31, 1996..............................       105,882         105,882        105,882
  Additional paid-in capital.......................................       245,247         245,247        991,957
  Partners' capital (deficit)......................................    (3,095,780)              0              0
  Accumulated deficit..............................................    (3,668,656)    (11,032,195)   (12,922,121)
  Stockholder receivable...........................................             0      (1,049,140)             0
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
          Total stockholders' equity (deficit).....................    (6,413,307)    (11,730,206)   (11,824,282)
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
               Total liabilities and stockholders' equity
                 (deficit).........................................   $20,910,356    $ 35,188,101    $42,456,495
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
                                                                      -----------    ------------    -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
  The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of these
                                balance sheets.
 
                                      F-3
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                            STATEMENTS OF OPERATIONS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                              THREE MONTHS
                                                               FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,              ENDED MARCH 31,
                                                          -----------------------------------------    --------------------------
                                                             1993           1994           1995           1995           1996
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                                                                              (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                       <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>
REVENUES:
  Services, rent and maintenance revenues..............   $11,118,899    $17,954,778    $28,908,433    $ 6,308,048    $ 9,936,948
  Product sales........................................     8,481,427     14,087,874     18,615,329      3,930,827      4,954,450
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
         Total revenues................................    19,600,326     32,042,652     47,523,762     10,238,874     14,891,398
OPERATING EXPENSES:
  Services, rent and maintenance.......................     2,748,354      4,591,793      7,059,694      1,574,496      2,308,341
  Cost of products sold................................     5,098,562     10,519,922     14,548,726      3,094,217      3,948,696
  Selling and marketing................................     1,813,795      3,331,799      5,399,041      1,457,712      1,771,399
  General and administrative...........................     3,376,729      5,165,112      8,718,724      1,663,509      3,421,859
  Depreciation and amortization........................     6,757,793      7,577,822     10,870,039      2,179,046      2,891,822
  Non-cash compensation expense (Note 5)...............             0              0              0              0        746,710
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
         Total expenses................................    19,795,233     31,186,448     46,596,224      9,968,980     15,088,827
         Income (loss) from operations.................      (194,907)       856,204        927,538        269,894       (197,429)
OTHER EXPENSE..........................................             0              0        163,396              0              0
INTEREST EXPENSE.......................................       517,489      1,024,286      2,483,887        522,354        638,232
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Loss before unusual item, provision for income taxes,
    discontinued operations and extraordinary item.....      (712,396)      (168,082)    (1,719,745)      (252,460)      (835,661)
UNUSUAL ITEM (Note 7)..................................             0       (589,861)      (564,404)             0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Loss before provision for income taxes, discontinued
    operations and extraordinary item..................      (712,396)      (757,943)    (2,284,149)      (252,460)      (835,661)
PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES.............................             0         32,500         49,499              0          5,125
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Loss before discontinued operations and extraordinary
    item...............................................      (712,396)      (790,443)    (2,333,648)      (252,460)      (840,786)
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS (Note 4).......................             0              0       (300,004)             0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Loss before extraordinary item.......................      (712,396)      (790,443)    (2,633,652)      (252,460)      (840,786)
EXTRAORDINARY ITEM (Note 3)............................             0              0       (312,733)             0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
         Net loss......................................   $  (712,396)   $  (790,443)   $(2,946,385)   $  (252,460)   $  (840,786)
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
PRO FORMA NET LOSS DATA (unaudited) (Notes 2 and 6):
LOSS BEFORE PROVISION FOR INCOME TAXES, DISCONTINUED
  OPERATIONS AND EXTRAORDINARY ITEM....................   $  (712,396)   $  (757,943)   $(2,284,149)   $  (252,460)   $  (835,661)
PRO FORMA INCOME TAX PROVISION.........................             0              0              0              0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Pro forma net loss before discontinued operations and
    extraordinary item.................................      (712,396)      (757,943)    (2,284,149)      (252,460)      (835,661)
DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS................................             0              0       (300,004)             0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Pro forma net loss before extraordinary item.........      (712,396)      (757,943)    (2,584,153)      (252,460)      (835,661)
EXTRAORDINARY ITEM.....................................             0              0       (312,733)             0              0
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
  Pro forma net loss...................................   $  (712,396)   $  (757,943)   $(2,896,876)   $  (252,460)   $  (835,661)
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                          -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------    -----------
PRO FORMA NET LOSS PER COMMON SHARE (Notes 2 and 6):
  Continuing operations................................                                 $      (.18)                  $      (.07)
  Discontinued operations..............................                                        (.02)                            0
  Extraordinary item...................................                                        (.03)                            0
                                                                                        -----------                   -----------
PRO FORMA NET LOSS PER COMMON SHARE....................                                 $      (.23)                  $      (.07)
                                                                                        -----------                   -----------
                                                                                        -----------                   -----------
PRO FORMA COMMON SHARES OUTSTANDING....................                                  12,805,259                    12,805,259
                                                                                        -----------                   -----------
                                                                                        -----------                   -----------
</TABLE>
    
 
  The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of these
                                  statements.
 
                                      F-4
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  STATEMENTS OF STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT)
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                         TOTAL
                                                        ADDITIONAL      PARTNERS'                                    STOCKHOLDERS'
                                            COMMON       PAID-IN         CAPITAL      ACCUMULATED     STOCKHOLDER       EQUITY
                                            STOCK        CAPITAL        (DEFICIT)       DEFICIT       RECEIVABLE       (DEFICIT)
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
<S>                                        <C>         <C>             <C>            <C>             <C>            <C>
BALANCE, December 31, 1992..............   $105,882    $    288,806    $  (194,072)   $(2,993,814)    $        0     $ (2,793,198) 
  Partners' draw........................          0               0       (747,436)             0              0         (747,436) 
  Net loss..............................          0               0       (561,730)      (150,666)             0         (712,396) 
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
BALANCE, December 31, 1993..............    105,882        288,,806     (1,503,238)    (3,144,480)             0       (4,253,030) 
  Partners' draw........................          0               0     (1,326,275)             0              0       (1,326,275) 
  Net loss..............................          0               0       (266,267)      (524,176)             0         (790,443) 
  Purchase and retirement of stock......          0         (43,559)             0              0              0          (43,559) 
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
BALANCE, December 31, 1994..............    105,882         245,247     (3,095,780)    (3,668,656)             0       (6,413,307) 
  Partners' draw........................          0               0     (1,043,826)             0              0       (1,043,826) 
  Termination of partnership (Note 1)...          0               0      4,139,606     (4,139,606)             0                0
  Stockholder receivable (Note 2).......          0               0              0              0     (1,049,140)      (1,049,140) 
  Stockholder distributions.............          0               0              0       (277,548)             0         (277,548) 
  Net loss..............................          0               0              0     (2,946,385)             0       (2,946,385) 
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
BALANCE, December 31, 1995..............    105,882         245,247              0    (11,032,195)    (1,049,140)     (11,730,206) 
  Stockholder distributions.............          0               0              0     (1,049,140)     1,049,140                0
  Non-cash compensation expense (Note
    5)..................................          0         746,710              0              0              0          746,710
  Net loss..............................          0               0              0       (840,786)             0         (840,786) 
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
BALANCE, March 31, 1996 (unaudited).....   $105,882    $    991,957    $         0    ($12,922,121)   $        0     $(11,824,282) 
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
                                           --------    ------------    -----------    ------------    -----------    -------------
</TABLE>
    
 
  The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of these
                                  statements.
 
                                      F-5
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                            STATEMENTS OF CASH FLOWS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                THREE MONTHS
                                                                 FOR THE YEAR ENDED DECEMBER 31,               ENDED MARCH 31,
                                                            ------------------------------------------   ---------------------------
                                                                1993           1994           1995           1995           1996
                                                            ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
                                                                                                                 (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                         <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>            <C>
CASH FLOWS FROM OPERATING ACTIVITIES:
  Net loss................................................ $   (712,396)  $   (790,443)  $ (2,946,385)  $   (252,460)  $   (840,786)
  Adjustments to reconcile net loss to net cash provided
     by (used in) operating activities --
     Depreciation and amortization........................    6,757,793      7,577,822     10,870,039      2,179,046      2,891,822
     Non-cash compensation expense........................            0              0              0              0        746,710
     Writeoff of debt financing costs.....................            0              0        312,732              0              0
     Changes in assets and liabilities....................
     (Increase) decrease in accounts receivable, net......      (85,351)      (574,200)      (741,072)        80,558       (252,632)
     Increase in inventory................................            0     (3,281,741)    (3,079,862)      (373,674)    (2,315,510)
     (Increase) decrease in prepaid expenses..............       32,254        (27,449)      (292,050)       (18,038)      (186,308)
     (Increase) decrease in intangibles and other
       assets.............................................      (48,124)        30,935     (1,486,049)      (346,652)      (178,299)
     Increase (decrease) in accounts payable..............    2,617,433      1,076,621      5,046,042     (1,717,834)    (2,500,234)
     Increase (decrease) in accrued expenses..............      372,489        991,251       (517,246)      (992,872)      (241,981)
     Increase in deferred revenues........................      270,703        149,531        704,025        294,904        354,982
     Increase (decrease) in subscriber deposits...........      (22,098)       (18,438)        15,633            195           (297)
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
          Net cash provided by (used in) operating
            activities....................................    9,182,703      5,133,889      7,885,807     (1,146,827)    (2,522,533)
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
CASH FLOWS USED IN INVESTING ACTIVITIES:
  Purchases of property and equipment, net................  (10,969,099)   (13,160,128)   (20,642,699)    (2,777,107)    (7,251,526)
CASH FLOWS FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES:
  Issuance of long-term debt..............................    2,884,123      9,800,000     14,350,000      3,448,964      9,750,000
  Repayment of long-term debt.............................            0         (3,325)        (3,810)             0              0
  Partners' draw..........................................     (747,436)    (1,326,275)    (1,043,826)      (239,111)             0
  Purchase of minority stockholder's stock................            0        (43,559)             0              0              0
  Debt financing costs....................................       (9,966)      (167,495)             0              0              0
  Distribution to stockholder.............................            0              0       (277,548)             0              0
  Stockholder receivable..................................            0              0     (1,049,140)             0              0
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
          Net cash provided by financing activities.......    2,126,721      8,259,346     11,975,676      3,209,853      9,750,000
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
          Net increase (decrease) in cash.................      340,325        233,107       (781,216)      (714,081)       (24,059)
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, beginning of period............      348,168        688,493        921,600        921,600        140,384
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
CASH AND CASH EQUIVALENTS, end of period.................. $    688,493   $    921,600   $    140,384   $    207,519   $    116,325
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
SUPPLEMENTAL DISCLOSURES OF CASH FLOW INFORMATION:
  Cash paid during the period for:
     Interest............................................. $    477,349   $    980,918   $  2,359,733   $    565,722   $    703,746
     Income taxes.........................................        5,997         32,500         17,567              0          5,351
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
                                                           ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------   ------------
</TABLE>
    
 
  The accompanying notes to financial statements are an integral part of these
                                  statements.
 
                                      F-6







<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                         NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS
 
(1) ORGANIZATION AND OPERATIONS:
 
     The  1993 and 1994  financial statements include  the accounts of Tri-State
Radio  Co.,  a  partnership,  and  the  following  entities  organized  as   'S'
corporations:  Tri-State  Radio  Corporation  of  Pennsylvania,  Inc., Tri-State
Answering Service, Inc.,  San Diego Paging,  Inc., Phoenix/Tucson Paging  Corp.,
First  Beeper  Warehouse,  Inc.,  Second Beeper  Warehouse,  Inc.,  Third Beeper
Warehouse, Inc. and  Southwest Paging, Inc.  On August 31,  1995, the  Companies
were  merged into one 'S' corporation, TSR Paging Inc. (the 'Company') (see Note
2). The Company provides wireless messaging services on the eastern coast of the
United States from  Boston to  Washington D.C.  and in  Southern California  and
Arizona.
 
     The  unaudited financial statements as of March  31, 1996 and for the three
months ended March 31, 1996 and 1995 have been prepared by the Company  pursuant
to  the  rules  and  regulations  of  the  Securities  and  Exchange Commission.
Accordingly, certain  information  and  note disclosures  normally  included  in
financial  statements prepared in conformity  with generally accepted accounting
principles have been condensed  or omitted. In the  opinion of the Company,  all
adjustments,  consisting  of  only normal  recurring  adjustments,  necessary to
present fairly the financial position, results of operations and changes in cash
flows for  the periods  presented  have been  made. These  financial  statements
should  be read  in conjunction  with the financial  statements and  notes as of
December 31, 1994 and 1995 and for  the years ended December 31, 1993, 1994  and
1995.
 
     The Company is currently implementing a significant expansion program which
involves  the Company's  entry into new  geographic markets  and compliance with
certain construction requirements.  The Company estimates  that it will  require
approximately  $60.0 million in  aggregate capital expenditures  during 1996 and
1997 in order to  fund this expansion.  The Company expects to  be able to  fund
these  capital requirements from a combination of  a portion of the net proceeds
from  the  Offerings,  available  funds  under  the  Company's  bank   financing
agreements and cash flow from its operations. However, there can be no assurance
that  the Company will be  able to complete its  expansion program as scheduled,
generate sufficient cash flow from operations  to meet a portion of its  capital
requirements  or obtain additional debt or equity financing, on reasonable terms
or at all.  In addition, the  Company will incur  substantial start-up costs  in
connection  with expanding its operations into new markets, which will result in
initial operating losses in those markets. Any such operating losses could  have
a  material  adverse effect  on  the Company's  results  of operations  for such
periods. Based upon historical positive cash flow and available borrowings under
a credit  facility, the  Company  believes that  it  has adequate  resources  to
sustain its current operations.
 
(2) SUMMARY OF SIGNIFICANT ACCOUNTING POLICIES:
 
  Use of Estimates in the Preparation of Financial Statements
 
     The  preparation  of  financial  statements  in  conformity  with generally
accepted  accounting  principles  requires  management  to  make  estimates  and
assumptions  that  affect the  reported amounts  of  assets and  liabilities and
disclosure of contingent  assets and liabilities  at the date  of the  financial
statements  and  the  reported  amounts  of  revenues  and  expenses  during the
reporting period. Actual results could differ from those estimates.
 
  Revenue Recognition
 
     The Company  recognizes  revenue  under  service,  rental  and  maintenance
agreements  with  customers  as  the  related  services  are  performed. Advance
billings for services are deferred and recognized as revenue when earned.  Sales
of  pagers are recognized upon delivery. The Company leases certain pagers under
operating leases.  Substantially all  of these  leases are  on a  month-to-month
basis.
 
                                      F-7
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
  Equipment And Leasehold Improvements
 
     Equipment  and leasehold improvements are  stated at cost, less accumulated
depreciation and amortization. Depreciation and amortization are computed  using
the  double-declining balance method for pagers and the straight-line method for
all other equipment and  leasehold improvements and are  based on the  following
estimated useful lives:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                   <C>
Pagers and other equipment.........................................   3 to 8 years
Furniture and fixtures.............................................   5 to 10 years
</TABLE>
 
     Leasehold  improvements are depreciated  over the shorter  of the estimated
useful life of the  asset or the lease  term. The net book  value of the  pagers
that  are  lost or  determined  to be  obsolete  are written  off  as additional
depreciation expense.
 
     Equipment and leasehold improvements consists of the following:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                    DECEMBER 31,            MARCH 31,
                                                             --------------------------    -----------
                                                                1994           1995           1996
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                                                           (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                          <C>            <C>            <C>
Pagers, paging equipment and other equipment..............   $19,178,926    $30,752,948    $36,558,359
Furniture and fixtures....................................       272,298        578,443        721,566
     Leasehold improvements...............................       568,345      1,398,161      1,762,293
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                              20,019,569     32,729,552     39,042,218
Less -- Accumulated depreciation and amortization.........     5,199,037      8,136,360     10,089,322
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
Equipment and leasehold improvements, net.................   $14,820,532    $24,593,192    $28,952,896
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
</TABLE>
 
  Intangible And Other Assets
 
     Intangible and other assets, net of accumulated amortization, are  composed
of the following:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                      DECEMBER 31,          MARCH 31,
                                                                 ----------------------    -----------
                                                                   1994         1995          1996
                                                                 --------    ----------    -----------
                                                                                           (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                              <C>         <C>           <C>
Licenses......................................................   $ 34,288    $  270,444    $   467,584
Security deposits and other assets............................    138,320       277,874        334,132
Debt financing costs..........................................    341,439     1,068,163      1,027,906
Other.........................................................     16,357        87,240         52,398
                                                                 --------    ----------    -----------
                                                                 $530,404    $1,703,721    $ 1,882,020
                                                                 --------    ----------    -----------
                                                                 --------    ----------    -----------
</TABLE>
 
     The  cost  of acquired  licenses  is being  amortized  over 25  years  on a
straight-line basis. Debt financing costs are  being amortized over the life  of
the loan.
 
  Income Taxes
 
     The  Company has previously elected  to be taxed as  an S corporation under
Subchapter S of the Internal  Revenue Code. Consequently, the stockholders  were
taxed  on  their proportionate  share  of the  Company's  taxable income  and no
provision for  Federal  income  taxes  has been  provided  in  the  accompanying
statements of operations.
 
     In  connection with the completion of  the proposed initial public offering
(see Note 9), the Company will no longer qualify as an 'S' corporation and  will
become subject to corporate income taxes (see Note 6).
 
                                      F-8
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
  Long-Lived Assets
 
     During  1995, the Company adopted the  provisions of Statement of Financial
Accounting Standards  No.  121, 'Accounting  for  the Impairment  of  Long-Lived
Assets'  ('SFAS 121').  SFAS 121  requires, among  other things,  that an entity
review its  long-lived assets  and certain  related intangibles  for  impairment
whenever  changes in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount of an asset
may not be fully recoverable.  As a result of its  review, the Company does  not
believe that any impairment currently exists related to its long-lived assets.
 
  Stock Based Compensation
 
   
     The  Financial  Accounting  Standards  Board  has  issued  a  new standard,
'Accounting for  Stock-Based  Compensation'  ('SFAS 123').  SFAS  123  requires,
commencing in 1996, that an entity account for employee stock compensation under
a fair value based method. The Company intends to follow the option that permits
entities  to  continue to  measure  compensation cost  for  employee stock-based
compensation using the intrinsic value based method of accounting prescribed  by
APB  Opinion No. 25, 'Accounting for  Stock Issued to Employees' ('Opinion 25').
Effective with  year  end  1996  reporting, the  Company  will  make  pro  forma
disclosures  of net  income and earnings  per share  as if the  fair value based
method of accounting under SFAS 123 had been applied.
    
 
  Pro Forma Net Loss Per Common Share
 
   
     Pro forma net loss per common share has been computed by dividing pro forma
net loss adjusted for the S Corporation  termination by the pro forma number  of
common shares outstanding, adjusted for the number of shares whose proceeds will
be  used to pay the $35,000,000 dividend  to the stockholders in connection with
the initial  public  offering.  As  required  by  the  Securities  and  Exchange
Commission rules, all warrants, options and shares issued within one year of the
public  offering at less than the public offering  price (see Notes 5 and 9) are
assumed to be outstanding for each year presented for purposes of the per  share
calculation.
    
 
(3) LONG-TERM DEBT:
 
     Long-term debt consists of the following at:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                    DECEMBER 31,            MARCH 31,
                                                             --------------------------    -----------
                                                                1994           1995           1996
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                                                           (UNAUDITED)
<S>                                                          <C>            <C>            <C>
Revolving loan............................................   $19,650,000    $34,000,000    $43,750,000
Notes payable.............................................         3,810              0              0
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                              19,653,810     34,000,000     43,750,000
Less -- Current maturities................................         3,810              0              0
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
Long-term debt............................................   $19,650,000    $34,000,000    $43,750,000
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
                                                             -----------    -----------    -----------
</TABLE>
 
     On  January 20, 1994, the Company amended the existing revolving credit and
term loan  agreement (the  'Old  Agreement'). The  Old Agreement  increased  the
revolving  line of credit from $10,000,000 to a $22,000,000 revolving credit and
term loan  facility  secured  by  substantially all  of  the  Company's  assets.
Subsequently  on October 20, 1994, the Old Agreement was amended to increase the
revolving line of credit  to $28,000,000. As  a result, on  January 1, 1995  the
availability  under the revolving  line of credit  increased from $20,200,000 to
$28,000,000.
 
     Under the Old Agreement, the Company could designate the interest on all or
any portion of the borrowings outstanding  to be either a floating rate  option,
Certificate  of Deposit (CD) fixed rate option or a LIBOR fixed rate option. The
portion designated as a floating rate option bears interest at the higher of the
Federal Funds Rate  plus 1/2 of  1% or the  financial institution's prime  rate.
Both rates are
 
                                      F-9
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
increased  for  a predefined  margin ranging  from 1.00%  to 1.75%.  The portion
designated as a CD fixed rate option  bears interest at the rate, which, in  the
sole  opinion of the financial institution, has  been offered in the domestic CD
market plus  a  predefined margin  ranging  from  2.50% to  3.25%.  The  portion
designated  as a LIBOR fixed rate option  bears interest at the rate of interest
at which  U.S. deposits  are offered  in the  London interbank  markets, plus  a
predefined  margin ranging from 2.25% to  3.0%. The predefined margins are based
upon the level of indebtedness outstanding relative to cash flow, as defined.
 
     On July  17,  1995, the  Company  replaced the  Old  Agreement with  a  new
revolving  credit  and  term  loan  agreement  (the  'New  Agreement').  The New
Agreement  increased  the  revolving  line  of  credit  from  $28,000,000  to  a
$60,000,000 revolving credit and term loan facility secured by substantially all
of  the Company's assets.  As a result  of the termination  of the Old Agreement
$312,733 relating to deferred financing costs of the Old Agreement were  written
off  during 1995.  These costs  are reflected  as an  extraordinary item  in the
accompanying statements of operations.
 
     Under the New Agreement, only interest is payable quarterly until September
30, 1997 at which time amounts outstanding under the revolving credit  agreement
terminate and the balance outstanding will convert to a term note. The note will
be  repaid 2.5% in 1997, 12.5% in 1998,  20.25% in 1999, 26.5% in 2000, 29.5% in
2001 and 8.75% in  2002. Prepayments of borrowings  under this agreement may  be
required commencing June 30, 1998 should certain events, as set forth in the New
Agreement, occur.
 
     The  New  Agreement contains  various covenants  that, among  other things,
require the Company to  maintain certain financial ratios  and to limit  capital
expenditures, as defined.
 
     Under  the New Agreement, the Company may  designate the interest on all or
any portion of the borrowings outstanding to be either a floating rate option or
a Eurodollar fixed rate option. The portion designated as a floating rate option
bears interest at the  higher of the Federal  Funds Rate plus 1/2  of 1% or  the
financial  institution's corporate  base rate.  Both rates  are increased  for a
predefined margin ranging up to 1%. The portion designated as a Eurodollar fixed
rate option  bears interest  at  the rate  of interest  at  which U.  S.  dollar
deposits  are  offered  by the  financial  institution in  the  London interbank
market, plus a  predefined margin ranging  from 1.25% to  2.25%. The  predefined
margins  are based upon  the level of indebtedness  outstanding relative to cash
flow, as defined.
 
     The weighted average balances outstanding under the Old and New  Agreements
for  the years ended December 31, 1994 and 1995 and the three months ended March
31,  1996   (unaudited)   were   $14,526,473,   $26,108,011   and   $39,775,000,
respectively.  The maximum outstanding  borrowings for the  years ended December
31, 1994  and  1995 and  three  months ended  March  31, 1996  (unaudited)  were
$20,200,000,  $34,750,000  and $44,250,000,  respectively.  For the  years ended
December  31,  1994  and  1995  and  the  three  months  ended  March  31,  1996
(unaudited),  weighted  average  interest  rates were  7.14%,  9.15%  and 6.42%,
respectively.
 
     Commitment fees  of 0.5%  or 0.375%  per annum  are charged  on the  unused
balance,  as defined, depending on the attainment of certain leverage ratios, as
defined. Commitment fees are charged to interest expense as incurred.
 
     Aggregate maturities of long-term debt under the New Agreement at  December
31, 1995 were as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                     <C>
1996.................................................................   $         0
1997.................................................................       850,000
1998.................................................................     4,250,000
1999.................................................................     6,885,000
2000.................................................................     9,010,000
Thereafter...........................................................    13,005,000
                                                                        -----------
                                                                        $34,000,000
                                                                        -----------
                                                                        -----------
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-10
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
(4) DISCONTINUED OPERATIONS:
 
     In  December 1995,  the Company approved  the disposition  of its answering
service operations. The  net losses of  these operations for  1995, including  a
$185,000  provision  for loss  on disposal,  are included  in the  statements of
operations as discontinued  operations. Financial statements  for prior  periods
have not been restated. Revenues for the years ended December 31, 1993, 1994 and
1995  and  the three  months  ended March  31,  1995 and  1996  (unaudited) were
$257,000, $264,000,  $273,000, $70,000  and $66,000,  respectively. Losses  from
operations  for the  same periods were  $23,000, $39,000,  $116,000, $13,000 and
$110,000. The net assets related to this operation included in the  accompanying
balance  sheets were $42,000, $68,000 and $11,000 for December 31, 1994 and 1995
and March 31, 1996 (unaudited), respectively.
 
(5) STOCKHOLDERS' EQUITY (DEFICIT):
 
  Common Stock
 
   
     In connection  with the  proposed  initial public  offering of  its  common
stock,  the Company will  amend and restate its  certificate of incorporation to
increase the  number  of  authorized  shares  of  common  stock  from  1,000  to
20,000,000 shares.
    
 
  Phantom Stock Plan
 
     In  September 1995,  the Company  adopted the  1995 Phantom  Stock Plan for
Employees of TSR  Paging Inc. (the  'Phantom Stock Plan'  or the 'Plan'),  which
provides for the grant of units ('Units') representing interests in the Company.
 
     The  Plan is currently administered by the Board of Directors (the 'Board')
of the Company. The total number of Units available under the Phantom Stock Plan
for grants to employees of the Company  is 1,000,000. Grants of Units under  the
Plan  take the form  of individual grant  agreements, the form  and substance of
which, including the  number of Units,  the Strike Price  (if any), the  vesting
period and other terms, are determined in the discretion of the Board. The Board
has  the discretion to amend, suspend or  terminate the plan. No such amendment,
suspension or termination may modify  the rights of a  holder of Units under  an
individual grant agreement without such holder's consent.
 
     The  Phantom Stock Plan provides that the Company will be obligated to make
payments in respect of Units only upon  the happening of a Liquidity Event.  The
Plan  defines a Liquidity  Event as (i) a  Sale of the Company  or (ii) a Public
Offering. A Sale for purposes of the Plan is defined as (i) the consolidation or
merger of the Company with or into  any other Person, (ii) the sale or  transfer
by  the Company  of all or  substantially all of  its assets, (iii)  the sale or
transfer by  the  Stockholders  of  more than  50%  of  the  outstanding  equity
interests  of  the Company  or (iv)  the approval  of a  plan of  liquidation or
dissolution of the Company, except in the case of clauses (i) through (iii), for
transactions with  a Stockholder  or an  Affiliate of  a Stockholder.  A  Public
Offering  for purposes of the Plan is defined  as a public offering in which (i)
the aggregate  valuation,  subject to  certain  exceptions, of  the  outstanding
Common Stock of the Company, immediately prior to such offering is not less than
$215,000,000,  (ii) proceeds to  the Company, net  of underwriting discounts and
commissions,  are  at  least  $50,000,000,  (iii)  the  Notes  (as  defined   in
'Prospectus  Summary') are  repaid and (iv)  the shares of  the Company's Common
Stock are listed on the New York Stock Exchange or quoted on NASDAQ.
 
     The Plan provides  that if the  Liquidity Event is  a Public Offering,  the
holder  of Units  will be  entitled to  receive either  cash or  options, in the
discretion of the Board. If  the Liquidity Event is a  Sale of the Company,  the
holders  of  Units  will be  entitled  to receive  either  cash or  the  form of
consideration received in such Sale, in the discretion of the Board.
 
     During 1992  and 1993,  the  Company granted  to certain  employees  equity
interests  which  were to  be realized  upon the  occurrence of  certain events.
Effective January 1, 1996, these equity interests were
 
                                      F-11
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
   
cancelled and such employees were issued  168,900 units under the Phantom  Stock
Plan  at a strike  price of $0, vest  over a five-year  period from the original
date of grant in 1992 or 1993, as  applicable, and had a grant date value of  $6
per  unit.  The  employees  received  credit for  vesting  through  the  date of
cancellation of the equity interests. In  addition, on January 1, 1996,  150,350
units were issued under the Phantom Stock Plan, at a strike price of $6 per unit
and  vest over  a five-year period.  As determined by  an independent investment
bank valuation and the  Company's Compensation Committee the  per unit value  on
January  1, 1996, was  $6. As a  result, the financial  statements for the three
months ended March 31,  1996 reflect non-cash  compensation expense of  $747,000
(which  amount includes the cumulative effect  of the vesting from 1992 forward)
with  a  corresponding  credit  to  additional  paid-in-capital.  The  remaining
non-cash compensation expense of $266,000 will be recognized by the Company over
the  next  two  years.  In  connection with  the  initial  public  offering (the
'Offering'), the above units will be  converted to options under the TSR  Paging
Inc.  Employee Option  Plan (the  'Plan'). Assuming  an initial  public offering
price of $17.00 per share, the units will convert to a total of 316,407  options
at an exercise price of $8.50 per share.
    
 
     Holders  of Units under the Plan will  not have the rights or privileges of
stockholders of the Company.
 
  Stockholder Receivable
 
     During  1995,  the  Company  extended   loans  to  two  of  its   principal
stockholders totaling $1,049,140. The loans are noninterest bearing, and have no
defined repayment terms and are reflected as a reduction to capital (deficit) in
the  accompanying financial  statements. As of  March 31,  1996, the stockholder
receivable was reduced as a deemed distribution to the stockholders.
 
  Termination of 'S' Corporation
 
   
     Upon termination of the 'S' corporation, the accumulated deficit as of that
date will be transferred to additional paid-in capital.
    
 
(6) PRO FORMA INCOME TAXES (UNAUDITED):
 
     As described  in Note  2, the  Company previously  elected 'S'  corporation
status under the provisions of the Internal Revenue Code. In connection with the
completion of the initial public offering, the Company will no longer qualify as
an 'S' corporation and will become subject to Federal and state income taxes.
 
     The  following unaudited  pro forma  information has  been determined based
upon the  provisions of  Statement of  Financial Accounting  Standards No.  109,
'Accounting  for Income Taxes' (SFAS 109). The  Company would not have a Federal
and state income tax provision because  of net operating loss carryforwards  for
all periods presented.
 
     The  pro  forma income  tax provision  (benefit)  differs from  the amounts
computed by applying the Federal statutory rate  of 34% to loss before taxes  as
follows:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                            THREE MONTHS ENDED
                                                             DECEMBER 31,                       MARCH 31,
                                                 -------------------------------------    ----------------------
                                                   1993         1994          1995          1995         1996
                                                 ---------    ---------    -----------    ---------    ---------
                                                                                               (UNAUDITED)
 
<S>                                              <C>          <C>          <C>            <C>          <C>
Tax benefit at the statutory rate.............   $(242,000)   $(269,000)   $(1,002,000)   $ (86,000)   $(286,000)
State income taxes, net of Federal benefit....     (43,000)     (47,000)      (177,000)     (15,000)     (50,000)
Operating loss carry forward..................     285,000      316,000      1,179,000      101,000      336,000
                                                 ---------    ---------    -----------    ---------    ---------
                                                 $       0    $       0    $         0    $       0    $       0
                                                 ---------    ---------    -----------    ---------    ---------
                                                 ---------    ---------    -----------    ---------    ---------
</TABLE>
 
                                      F-12
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                  NOTES TO FINANCIAL STATEMENTS -- (CONTINUED)
 
(7) UNUSUAL ITEM:
 
     During  late 1993  and early 1994  the Company commenced  an initial public
offering which was subsequently terminated. As a result, deferred offering costs
amounting to $589,861 have been included as an unusual item in the  accompanying
statements  of operations for  1994. Costs of $28,394  relating to this offering
are included in the unusual loss for 1995.
 
     During 1995, the Company incurred  approximately $536,000 of costs  related
to  certain merger activity which were discontinued during the year. These costs
are reflected as an  unusual item in the  accompanying statements of  operations
for 1995.
 
(8) COMMITMENTS AND CONTINGENCIES:
 
     The  Company has operating  leases for office  and transmitting sites which
expire on various dates through 2002. In most cases, the Company expects that in
the normal  course of  business leases  will  be renewed  or replaced  by  other
leases.
 
     Minimum  annual rental commitments (exclusive  of taxes, maintenance, etc.)
under all noncancellable operating leases at December 31, 1995 are as follows:
 
<TABLE>
<S>                                                                      <C>
1996..................................................................   $3,811,621
1997..................................................................    3,291,383
1998..................................................................    2,660,996
1999..................................................................    1,750,284
2000..................................................................      977,196
Thereafter............................................................      733,266
</TABLE>
 
     Total rent  expense charged  to  operations for  the  and the  years  ended
December  31, 1993, 1994 and 1995 and three months ended March 31, 1995 and 1996
(unaudited) was  $1,251,600, $2,170,581,  $3,366,781, $749,586  and  $1,189,336,
respectively.
 
(9) SUBSEQUENT EVENT (UNAUDITED):
 
  Proposed Public Offering
 
   
     The Company contemplates the Offering of approximately 4,400,000 additional
shares of its common stock. (See 'Risk Factors' in the Registration Statement).
    
 
                                      F-13
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      (This page intentionally left blank)
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      (This page intentionally left blank)
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                      (This page intentionally left blank)






<PAGE>
<PAGE>
   
Inside  Back Cover of Prospectus: This page contains one photograph of a variety
of different paging units sold by the Company.
    






<PAGE>
<PAGE>
__________________________________            __________________________________
 
     No  person  has been  authorized to  give  any information  or to  make any
representation in connection with this offering being made hereby not  contained
in  this Prospectus, and,  if given or made,  such information or representation
must not be  relied upon  as having  been authorized  by the  Company, the  U.S.
Underwriters  or any other person. This  Prospectus does not constitute an offer
to sell or a solicitation  of an offer to buy  any securities offered hereby  in
any  jurisdiction in which it is unlawful  to make such offer or solicitation in
such jurisdiction. Neither  the delivery of  this Prospectus nor  any sale  made
hereunder  shall under any circumstances  create an implication that information
contained herein is correct as of any time subsequent to the date hereof.

                          ---------------------------
 
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                    PAGE
                                                                                                                    ----
<S>                                                                                                                 <C>
Summary..........................................................................................................      3
Risk Factors.....................................................................................................      8
The Company......................................................................................................     15
Use of Proceeds..................................................................................................     16
Dividend Policy..................................................................................................     16
Dilution.........................................................................................................     17
Capitalization...................................................................................................     18
Selected Financial and Operating Data............................................................................     19
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations............................     21
Business.........................................................................................................     30
Management.......................................................................................................     44
Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.............................................................     53
Principal Stockholders...........................................................................................     55
Description of Capital Stock.....................................................................................     57
Shares Eligible for Future Sale..................................................................................     59
Description of Certain Indebtedness..............................................................................     60
Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences For Non-United States Holders..............................     62
Underwriting.....................................................................................................     64
Legal Matters....................................................................................................     67
Experts..........................................................................................................     67
Additional Information...........................................................................................     67
Glossary.........................................................................................................     68
Index to Financial Statements....................................................................................    F-1
</TABLE>
    
 
                          ---------------------------
 
     Until             , 1996 (25  days after the date of this Prospectus),  all
dealers  effecting transactions in  the Common Stock  offered hereby, whether or
not participating in this distribution, may be required to deliver a Prospectus.
This is in addition to  the obligation of dealers  to deliver a Prospectus  when
acting   as  Underwriters  and  with  respect  to  their  unsold  allotments  or
subscriptions.


   
                                4,400,000 SHARES
    
 
                                     [LOGO]
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
 
                          ---------------------------
                                   PROSPECTUS
                                          , 1996
                          ---------------------------
 
                                LEHMAN BROTHERS
                               SMITH BARNEY INC.
                          WESSELS, ARNOLD & HENDERSON
                               BRENNER SECURITIES
                                  CORPORATION
 
__________________________________            __________________________________





<PAGE>
<PAGE>

                                                                [ALTERNATE PAGE]


Information   contained  herein  is  subject   to  completion  or  amendment.  A
registration statement  relating to  these securities  has been  filed with  the
Securities  and Exchange  Commission. These securities  may not be  sold nor may
offers to buy be accepted prior  to the time the registration statement  becomes
effective.  This  prospectus  shall  not  constitute an  offer  to  sell  or the
solicitation of an offer to buy nor shall there be any sale of these  securities
in  any State in which such offer,  solicitation or sale would be unlawful prior
to registration or qualification under the securities laws of any such State.


   
                   SUBJECT TO COMPLETION, DATED JUNE 19, 1996
    
PROSPECTUS
   
                                4,400,000 SHARES
                                 TSR PAGING INC.                          [LOGO]
                                  COMMON STOCK
                          ---------------------------
    
 
   
     All  of the shares of  Common Stock, par value  $.01 per share (the 'Common
Stock'), of TSR Paging Inc. (the 'Company') offered hereby are being offered  by
the Company. Of the 4,400,000 shares of Common Stock offered, 880,000 shares are
being   offered  initially  outside   the  United  States   and  Canada  by  the
International Managers (the 'International  Offering') and 3,520,000 shares  are
being offered initially inside the United States and Canada in a concurrent U.S.
Offering  (the  'U.S. Offering')  by the  U.S.  Underwriters (together  with the
International Managers, the  'Underwriters'). These  offerings are  collectively
referred to herein as the 'Offerings.' See 'Underwriting.'
    
 
   
     Prior  to the  Offerings, there  has been no  public market  for the Common
Stock. It is currently anticipated that  the initial public offering price  will
be  between $16.00 and $18.00  per share. The initial  public offering price and
the underwriting discount and commission per share are identical for each of the
Offerings. See 'Underwriting' for information relating to the factors considered
in determining the initial public offering price.
    
 
   
     The Common  Stock has  been approved  for listing  on the  Nasdaq  National
Market, subject to official notice of issuance, under the symbol 'BEEP.'
    
                          ---------------------------
 
     FOR  A DISCUSSION OF CERTAIN  RISKS TO BE CONSIDERED  IN CONNECTION WITH AN
INVESTMENT IN THE COMMON STOCK OFFERED  HEREBY, SEE 'RISK FACTORS' BEGINNING  ON
PAGE 8.
                          ---------------------------
 
THESE  SECURITIES  HAVE  NOT  BEEN APPROVED  OR  DISAPPROVED  BY  THE SECURITIES
     AND  EXCHANGE   COMMISSION   OR  ANY   STATE   SECURITIES   COMMISSION
        NOR  HAS  THE SECURITIES  AND EXCHANGE  COMMISSION OR  ANY STATE
          SECURITIES  COMMISSION   PASSED   UPON   THE   ACCURACY   OR
               ADEQUACY  OF  THIS  PROSPECTUS.  ANY  REPRESENTATION
                        TO THE CONTRARY IS A CRIMINAL OFFENSE.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                    PRICE TO            UNDERWRITING DISCOUNTS           PROCEEDS TO
                                                     PUBLIC               AND COMMISSIONS (1)            COMPANY (2)
<S>                                          <C>                     <C>                            <C>
Per Share..................................            $                           $                          $
Total (3)..................................            $                           $                          $
</TABLE>
 
(1) The Company  has  agreed  to  indemnify  the  Underwriters  against  certain
    liabilities,  including  liabilities under  the Securities  Act of  1933, as
    amended. See 'Underwriting.'
   
(2) Before deducting expenses payable by the Company estimated at $750,000.
    
   
(3) The Company has  granted to the  International Managers a  30-day option  to
    purchase  up to 532,000 additional shares of  Common Stock on the same terms
    and conditions as set forth above  solely to cover over-allotments, if  any.
    The  U.S. Underwriters have been granted a  similar option to purchase up to
    128,000 additional shares solely to  cover over-allotments, if any. If  such
    options  are  exercised in  full, the  total  Price to  Public, Underwriting
    Discounts and Commissions and  Proceeds to Company will  be $              ,
    $           and $           , respectively. See 'Underwriting.'
    
                          ---------------------------
 
     The  shares of Common Stock  offered by this Prospectus  are offered by the
International Managers subject  to prior  sale, to  withdrawal, cancellation  or
modification  of the offer without notice, to  delivery to and acceptance by the
International Managers and to  certain further conditions.  It is expected  that
delivery  of the shares will be made at the offices of Lehman Brothers Inc., New
York, New York, on or about           , 1996.
                          ---------------------------
 
LEHMAN BROTHERS
                SMITH BARNEY INC.
                                  WESSELS, ARNOLD & HENDERSON
                                                              BRENNER SECURITIES
                                                                  CORPORATION
               , 1996




<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                                        [ALTERNATE PAGE]
 
__________________________________            __________________________________
 
     No  person  has been  authorized to  give  any information  or to  make any
representation in connection with this offering being made hereby not  contained
in  this Prospectus, and,  if given or made,  such information or representation
must not  be  relied  upon  as  having  been  authorized  by  the  Company,  the
Underwriters  or any other person. This  Prospectus does not constitute an offer
to sell or a solicitation  of an offer to buy  any securities offered hereby  in
any  jurisdiction in which it is unlawful  to make such offer or solicitation in
such jurisdiction. Neither  the delivery of  this Prospectus nor  any sale  made
hereunder  shall under any circumstances  create an implication that information
contained herein is correct as of any time subsequent to the date hereof.

                          ---------------------------
 
                               TABLE OF CONTENTS
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                                    PAGE
                                                                                                                    ----
<S>                                                                                                                 <C>
Summary..........................................................................................................      3
Risk Factors.....................................................................................................      8
The Company......................................................................................................     15
Use of Proceeds..................................................................................................     16
Dividend Policy..................................................................................................     16
Dilution.........................................................................................................     17
Capitalization...................................................................................................     18
Selected Financial and Operating Data............................................................................     19
Management's Discussion and Analysis of Financial Condition and Results of Operations............................     21
Business.........................................................................................................     30
Management.......................................................................................................     44
Certain Relationships and Related Party Transactions.............................................................     53
Principal Stockholders...........................................................................................     55
Description of Capital Stock.....................................................................................     57
Shares Eligible for Future Sale..................................................................................     59
Description of Certain Indebtedness..............................................................................     60
Certain United States Federal Income Tax Consequences For Non-United States Holders..............................     62
Underwriting.....................................................................................................     64
Legal Matters....................................................................................................     67
Experts..........................................................................................................     67
Additional Information...........................................................................................     67
Glossary.........................................................................................................     68
Index to Financial Statements....................................................................................    F-1
</TABLE>
    
 
                          ---------------------------
 
     Until             , 1996 (25  days after the date of this Prospectus),  all
dealers  effecting transactions in  the Common Stock  offered hereby, whether or
not participating in this distribution, may be required to deliver a Prospectus.
This is in addition to  the obligation of dealers  to deliver a Prospectus  when
acting   as  Underwriters  and  with  respect  to  their  unsold  allotments  or
subscriptions.

   
                                4,400,000 SHARES
    
 
                                     [LOGO]
 
                                  COMMON STOCK
 
                          ---------------------------
                                   PROSPECTUS
                                          , 1996
                          ---------------------------
 
                                LEHMAN BROTHERS
                               SMITH BARNEY INC.
                          WESSELS, ARNOLD & HENDERSON
                               BRENNER SECURITIES
                                  CORPORATION




<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                    PART II
                     INFORMATION NOT REQUIRED IN PROSPECTUS
 
ITEM 13. OTHER EXPENSES OF ISSUANCE AND DISTRIBUTION.
 
     The  following table  sets forth  the expenses  expected to  be incurred in
connection with the issuance and distribution of Common Stock registered hereby,
all of which expenses, except for the Commission registration fee, the  National
Association  of  Securities Dealers,  Inc. filing  fee  and the  Nasdaq National
Market listing application fee, are estimates:
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                       DESCRIPTION                                             AMOUNT
- ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------   ----------
<S>                                                                                          <C>
Securities and Exchange Commission registration fee.......................................   $   25,863
National Association of Securities Dealers, Inc. filing fee...............................        8,000
Nasdaq National Market Listing Application fee............................................             *
Accounting fees and expenses..............................................................             *
Legal fees and expenses...................................................................             *
Printing and engraving fees and expenses..................................................             *
Blue Sky fees and expenses................................................................             *
Transfer Agent fees and expenses..........................................................             *
Miscellaneous expenses....................................................................             *
                                                                                             ----------
     Total................................................................................   $         *
                                                                                             ----------
                                                                                             ----------
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
*  To be completed by amendment.
 
ITEM 14. INDEMNIFICATION OF DIRECTORS AND OFFICERS.
 
     The Company  is  a  Delaware  corporation. Reference  is  made  to  Section
102(b)(7)  of the Delaware General Corporation Law (the 'DGCL'), which enables a
corporation in its original certificate of incorporation or an amendment thereto
to eliminate or limit the personal liability of a director for violations of the
director's fiduciary duty, except (i) for  any breach of the director's duty  of
loyalty  to the corporation or its stockholders,  (ii) for acts or omissions not
in good faith or which involve intentional misconduct or a knowing violation  of
law  (iii)  pursuant to  Section 174  of  the DGCL  (providing for  liability of
directors for  unlawful payments  of  dividends of  unlawful stock  purchase  or
redemptions)  or  (iv) for  any  transaction from  which  a director  derived an
improper personal benefit.
 
     Reference is also made to  Section 145 of the  DGCL, which provides that  a
corporation  may indemnify any person, including an officer or director, who is,
or is threatened to be made, party to any threatened, pending or completed legal
action,  suit  or  proceeding,   whether  civil,  criminal,  administrative   or
investigative  (other than an action by or in the right of such corporation), by
reason of the fact that such person was an officer, director, employee or  agent
of such corporation or is or was serving at the request of such corporation as a
director,  officer, employee or agent of  another corporation or enterprise. The
indemnity may include expenses (including attorneys' fees), judgments, fines and
amounts paid in settlement  actually and reasonably incurred  by such person  in
connection  with  such  action,  suit  or  proceeding,  provided  such  officer,
director, employee or agent acted  in good faith and  in a manner he  reasonably
believed  to be in, or not opposed  to, the corporation's best interest and, for
criminal proceedings, had no  reasonable cause to believe  that his conduct  was
unlawful.  A Delaware  corporation may indemnify  any officer or  director in an
action by or in the right of  the corporation under the same conditions,  except
that no indemnification is permitted without judicial approval if the officer or
director  is  adjudged to  be liable  to  the corporation.  Where an  officer or
director is successful on the merits or  otherwise in the defense of any  action
referred  to above, the corporation must indemnify him against the expenses that
such officer or director actually and reasonably incurred.
 
     Article 6, Section 5  of the Restated Certificate  of Incorporation of  the
Company   (filed   as  Exhibit   3.1)  provides   that,  except   under  certain
circumstances, directors of the  Company shall not be  personally liable to  the
Company  or its stockholders for monetary damages for breach of fiduciary duties
as a
 
                                      II-1
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
director and provides for indemnification of  the officers and directors of  the
Company to the full extent permitted by applicable law.
 
ITEM 15. RECENT SALES OF UNREGISTERED SECURITIES.
 
     None.
 
ITEM 16. EXHIBITS.
 
     (a) Exhibits:
 
          The  following exhibits are  filed pursuant to  Item 601 of Regulation
     S-K.
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
EXHIBIT
  NO.                                                     DESCRIPTION
- -------   ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
 
<C>       <S>
  *1.1    -- Form of Underwriting Agreement.
  *3.1    -- Amended and Restated Certificate of Incorporation of the Company.
  *3.2    -- Amended and Restated By-Laws of the Company.
  *4.1    -- Specimen Certificate of Common Stock.
  *5      -- Opinion of Latham & Watkins regarding the validity of the securities being registered.
  *9.1    -- Agreement between Leonard DiSavino and the DiSavino Trust.
  *9.2    -- Agreement between Philip Sacks and the Sacks Trust.
 *10.1    -- Credit Agreement among the Company, The First Chicago National Bank, N.A. and certain other lenders, as
            amend and restated on August 31, 1995.
  23.1    -- Consent of Arthur Andersen LLP.
 *23.2    -- Consent of Latham & Watkins (included in their opinion filed as Exhibit 5).
  24      -- Power of Attorney (included in signature page).
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
*  To be filed by amendment.
 
     (b) Financial Statement Schedules.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                                                                    PAGE
                                                                                                    ----
 
<S>                                                                                                 <C>
Schedule II -- Valuation and Qualifying Accounts                                                    S-1
</TABLE>
    
 
     All other Schedules are omitted as the required information is inapplicable
or is presented in the financial statements or related notes.
 
ITEM 17. UNDERTAKINGS.
 
     (a)  The  undersigned  Registrant  hereby  undertakes  to  provide  to  the
Underwriters   at  the   closing  specified   in  the   Underwriting  Agreement,
certificates in such denominations and registered  in such names as required  by
the Underwriters to permit prompt delivery to each purchaser.
 
     (b) Insofar as indemnification for liabilities arising under the Securities
Act  of 1933 may be permitted to  directors, officers and controlling persons of
the  Registrant  pursuant  to  the  foregoing  provisions,  or  otherwise,   the
Registrant  has been advised that in the  opinion of the Securities and Exchange
Commission, such indemnification is  against public policy  as expressed in  the
Act   and  is,  therefore,  unenforceable.  In   the  event  that  a  claim  for
indemnification  against  such  liabilities  (other  than  the  payment  by  the
Registrant  of expenses incurred  or paid by a  director, officer or controlling
person of  the Registrant  in the  successful  defense of  any action,  suit  or
proceeding)  is  asserted by  such director,  officer  or controlling  person in
connection with the securities being registered, the Registrant will, unless  in
the opinion of its counsel the matter has been settled by controlling precedent,
submit  to  a  court  of  appropriate  jurisdiction  the  question  whether such
indemnification by it is against public policy as expressed in the Act and  will
be governed by the final adjudication of such issue.
 
     (c) The undersigned Registrant hereby undertakes that:
 
          (1) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act
     of  1933, the information omitted from the form of Prospectus filed as part
     of this Registration Statement in reliance upon
 
                                      II-2
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
     Rule 430A and  contained in a  form of Prospectus  filed by the  Registrant
     pursuant  to Rule 424(b)(1) or (4) or 497(h) under the Securities Act shall
     be deemed to be a part of this Registration Statement as of the time it was
     declared effective.
 
          (2) For purposes of determining any liability under the Securities Act
     of 1933, each post-effective amendment  that contains a form of  Prospectus
     shall  be  deemed  to  be  a new  registration  statement  relating  to the
     securities offered therein,  and the  offering of such  securities at  that
     time shall be deemed to be the initial bona fide offering thereof.
 
                                      II-3


<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                   SIGNATURES
 
   
     Pursuant  to the requirements of the Securities Act of 1933, the Registrant
has duly caused this Registration  Statement to be signed  on its behalf by  the
undersigned,  thereunto duly authorized, in  the City of Fort  Lee, State of New
Jersey on June 18, 1996.
    
 
                                          TSR PAGING INC.
 
                                          By:        /S/ LEONARD DISAVINO
                                               .................................
                                                      LEONARD DISAVINO
                                                CO-CHAIRMAN OF THE BOARD OF
                                                          DIRECTORS,
                                               PRESIDENT AND CHIEF EXECUTIVE
                                                           OFFICER
   
    
 
     Pursuant  to  the  requirements  of  the  Securities  Act  of  1933,   this
Registration  Statement  has  been  signed  by  the  following  persons  in  the
capacities and as of the dates indicated.
 
   
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                SIGNATURE                                      TITLE                              DATE
- ------------------------------------------  --------------------------------------------   -------------------
<C>                                         <S>                                            <C>
           /S/ LEONARD DISAVINO             Co-Chairman of the Board of Directors,            June 18, 1996
 .........................................    President and Chief Executive Officer
            (LEONARD DISAVINO)                (Principal Executive Officer)
 
                    *                       Co-Chairman of the Board of Directors, Chief      June 18, 1996
 .........................................    Operating Officer and Secretary
              (PHILIP SACKS)
 
                    *                       Director, Executive Vice President --             June 18, 1996
 .........................................    Operations and Chief Financial Officer
             (MITCHELL SACKS)                 (Principal Financial Officer)
 
                    *                       Vice President -- Controller (Principal           June 18, 1996
 .........................................    Accounting Officer)
            (MITCHELL PEIPERT)
 
                    *                       Director                                          June 18, 1996
 .........................................
          (WILLIAM P. COLLATOS)
 
                    *                       Director                                          June 18, 1996
 .........................................
            (STEPHEN J. GAAL)
 
                    *                       Director                                          June 18, 1996
 .........................................
            (ROGER H. KIMMEL)
 
                    *                       Director                                          June 18, 1996
 .........................................
          (KENNETH T. SCHICIANO)
 
       *By     /s/ LEONARD DISAVINO
 .........................................
             LEONARD DISAVINO
             ATTORNEY-IN-FACT
</TABLE>
    
 
                                      II-4
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                                                    EXHIBIT 23.1
 
                   CONSENT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS
 
To TSR PAGING INC.:
 
     As independent public  accountants, we  hereby consent  to the  use of  our
reports  and to all  references to our Firm  included in or made  a part of this
registration statement.
 
                                          ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
 
   
Roseland, New Jersey
June 18, 1996
    
 
                                      II-5
 

<PAGE>
<PAGE>
             REPORT OF INDEPENDENT PUBLIC ACCOUNTANTS ON SCHEDULES
 
To TSR PAGING INC.:
 
     We have audited in accordance  with generally accepted auditing  standards,
the  1993, 1994  and 1995  financial statements of  TSR Paging  Inc. included on
pages F-2 through F-13 of this registration statement and have issued our report
thereon dated March 1, 1996. Our audits were made for the purpose of forming  an
opinion  on the basic financial statements taken as a whole. The schedule listed
in Item  16(b) of  this  registration statement  is  the responsibility  of  the
Company's  management  and  is  presented for  purposes  of  complying  with the
Securities and  Exchange  Commission's  rules  and is  not  part  of  the  basic
financial   statements.  This  schedule  has  been  subjected  to  the  auditing
procedures applied  in  the audits  of  the  basic financial  statements  as  of
December  31, 1994 and 1995 and for each  of the three years in the period ended
December 31, 1995, and, in our  opinion, fairly states in all material  respects
the  financial data required  to be set  forth therein in  relation to the basic
financial statements taken as a whole.
 
                                          ARTHUR ANDERSEN LLP
 
Roseland, New Jersey
March 1, 1996
 
                                      II-6




<PAGE>
<PAGE>
                                                                     SCHEDULE II
 
                                TSR PAGING INC.
                       VALUATION AND QUALIFYING ACCOUNTS
 
<TABLE>
<CAPTION>
                                                              BALANCE
                                                                AT          CHARGED
                                                             BEGINNING      TO COSTS                      BALANCE AT
                       DESCRIPTION                            OF YEAR     AND EXPENSES    DEDUCTION(A)    END OF YEAR
- ----------------------------------------------------------   ---------    ------------    ------------    -----------
<S>                                                          <C>          <C>             <C>             <C>
For the year ended December 31, 1993......................   $  61,000      $426,832       $ (181,832)     $ 306,000
For the year ended December 31, 1994......................     306,000       528,214         (685,479)       148,735
For the year ended December 31, 1995......................     148,735       779,283         (724,621)       203,397
</TABLE>
 
- ------------
 
 (a) Uncollectible accounts written off, net of recoveries.
 
                                      S-1



                              STATEMENT OF DIFFERENCES
                              ------------------------

The trademark symbol shall be expressed as 'TM'


<PAGE>



© 2022 IncJournal is not affiliated with or endorsed by the U.S. Securities and Exchange Commission